September 2012
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKZ
Litho in U.S.A.
DH6J 19A321 AA
2013 MKZ OWNER’S MANUAL
2013 MKZ
OWNER’S MANUAL
lincolnowner.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the
interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or
equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Lincoln 2012
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20120823160324
Introduction
About This Manual..................................7
Symbols Glossary....................................7
Data Recording........................................9
California Proposition 65.....................11
Perchlorate...............................................12
Lincoln Credit...........................................12
Replacement Parts
Recommendation..............................12
Special Notices.......................................13
Mobile Communications
Equipment............................................13
Export Unique Options........................14
Child Safety
General Information.............................15
Child Seat Positioning..........................17
Booster Seats..........................................18
Installing Child Seats............................21
Child Safety Locks................................29
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..........................31
Fastening the Safety Belts................32
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.......36
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and
Indicator Chime.................................37
Safety Belt Minder................................38
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance......................................40
Personal Safety
System™
Personal Safety System™.................41
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.........................42
Driver and Passenger Airbags..........44
Knee Airbag............................................45
Front Passenger Sensing
System..................................................45
Side Airbags...........................................48
Side Curtain Airbags............................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator................................................51
Airbag Disposal......................................52
Keys and Remote
Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies........................................53
Remote Control.....................................54
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..................................................57
MyKey®
Principle of Operation.........................58
Creating a MyKey..................................59
Clearing All MyKeys.............................59
Checking MyKey System
Status...................................................60
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...............................................60
MyKey Troubleshooting.......................61
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.......................62
Keyless Entry..........................................68
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release.................................................70
1
Table of Contents
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System................72
Anti-Theft Alarm...................................73
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...........75
Audio Control.........................................76
Voice Control...........................................77
Cruise Control.........................................77
Information Display Control..............77
Heated Steering Wheel......................78
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers...............................79
Autowipers..............................................79
Windshield Washers...........................80
Lighting
Lighting Control.....................................82
Autolamps...............................................82
Instrument Lighting Dimmer............83
Headlamp Exit Delay...........................83
Daytime Running Lamps...................83
Automatic High Beam Control........84
Direction Indicators..............................85
Interior Lamps........................................85
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows....................................87
Global Opening and Closing............88
Exterior Mirrors......................................88
Interior Mirror.........................................90
Sun Visors...............................................90
Sun Shades..............................................91
Moonroof..................................................91
Instrument Cluster
Gauges......................................................94
Warning Lamps and Indicators.......95
Audible Warnings and
Indicators.............................................99
Information Displays
General Information..........................100
Information Messages......................105
Audio System
General Information...........................122
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD........................................123
Media Hub..............................................125
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control.............126
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate................................................127
Heated Windows and Mirrors.........128
Cabin Air Filter......................................129
Remote Start........................................129
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..........131
Head Restraints....................................131
Power Seats..........................................133
Memory Function................................135
Rear Seats..............................................137
Heated Seats.........................................137
Ventilated Seats..................................139
Rear Seat Armrest..............................140
2
Table of Contents
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener......142
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.......................147
Storage Compartments
Center Console....................................149
Overhead Console..............................149
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information..........................150
Keyless Starting...................................150
Starting a Gasoline Engine..............152
Engine Block Heater...........................153
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.............................155
Fuel Quality...........................................156
Running Out of Fuel...........................156
Refueling................................................158
Fuel Consumption..............................160
Emission Control System..................161
Transmission
Automatic Transmission..................165
Hill Start Assist.....................................170
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive.........................171
Brakes
General Information............................177
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..................................................178
Electric Parking Brake........................178
Traction Control
Principle of Operation........................181
Using Traction Control.......................181
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.......................182
Using Stability Control......................183
Parking Aids
Parking Aid............................................184
Active Park Assist...............................186
Rear View Camera...............................191
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.......................195
Using Cruise Control..........................195
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.......196
Driving Aids
Driver Alert............................................203
Lane Keeping System......................208
Blind Spot Monitor..............................212
Steering...................................................217
Load Carrying
Load Limit..............................................219
Towing
Towing a Trailer....................................227
Recommended Towing
Weights...............................................227
3
Table of Contents
Essential Towing Checks.................229
Transporting the Vehicle...................231
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels................................................232
Driving Hints
Breaking-In............................................235
Economical Driving............................235
Driving Through Water.....................236
Floor Mats.............................................236
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance........................238
Hazard Warning Flashers................239
Fuel Cut-Off Switch..........................239
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.............240
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need......243
In California (U.S. Only)...................244
The Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program (U.S.
Only)...................................................245
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)..............247
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S.
and Canada......................................247
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature...........................................248
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...................................................249
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...................................................250
Fuses
Changing a Fuse..................................251
Fuse Specification Chart.................252
Maintenance
General Information..........................263
Opening and Closing the Hood.....264
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™......................................265
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L..........266
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.......................................267
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L.................267
Engine Oil Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L............................267
Engine Coolant Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L............................268
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...................................................272
Brake Fluid Check...............................276
Power Steering Fluid Check............276
Fuel Filter...............................................276
Washer Fluid Check............................277
Changing the 12V Battery.................277
Checking the Wiper Blades............279
Changing the Wiper Blades............279
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L............................280
Adjusting the Headlamps................281
Removing a Headlamp....................282
Changing a Bulb.................................282
Bulb Specification Chart.................283
Vehicle Care
General Information..........................284
Cleaning Products.............................284
Cleaning the Exterior........................284
Repairing Minor Paint Damage......285
Waxing...................................................285
Cleaning the Engine..........................286
4
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades................................................286
Cleaning the Interior..........................287
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..............287
Cleaning Leather Seats...................288
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.............289
Vehicle Storage...................................289
Wheels and Tires
Temporary Mobility Kit.....................292
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...............................................298
Tire Care................................................304
Using Snow Chains............................319
Changing a Road Wheel...................319
Technical Specifications.................324
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications.......................325
Motorcraft Parts.................................325
Vehicle Identification Number.......327
Vehicle Certification Label..............328
Transmission Code
Designation......................................328
Technical Specifications.................329
Accessories
Accessories...........................................332
Ford Extended Service
Plan (ESP)
Ford Extended Service Plan
(ESP)..................................................334
MyLincoln Touch™
General Information..........................337
Settings...................................................351
Entertainment......................................361
Phone.....................................................385
Information...........................................392
Climate..................................................403
Navigation.............................................407
Appendices
End User License Agreement.........419
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance.................440
5
Table of Contents
6
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time
to get to know your vehicle by reading
this manual. The more that you know
about it, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and
operating the controls and features
on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available
throughout the range, sometimes even
before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may be used for different
models, so may appear different to
your vehicle. However, the essential
information in the illustrations is
always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your
vehicle in line with all applicable laws
and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when
selling your vehicle. It is an integral part
of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location
of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is
determined when facing forward in
the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting
the environment. Correct vehicle
usage and the authorized disposal of
waste, cleaning and lubrication
materials are significant steps toward
this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you
may see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or
sparks
7
Introduction
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or
unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
E91392
Heated windshield
Interior luggage
compartment release
Jack
Lighting control
8
Introduction
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle
are capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your
vehicle. This potentially includes
information about the performance
or status of various systems and
modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In
order to properly diagnose and service
your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among
them vehicle diagnostic information
received through a direct connection
to your vehicle when diagnosing or
servicing your vehicle. Additionally,
when your vehicle is in for service or
repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among
them data for vehicle improvement
purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped),
if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by
Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See MyLincoln
Touch™ (page 337).
9
Introduction
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder. The main
purpose of an event data recorder
is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The event
data recorder is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30
seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this
vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was
travelling; and
• Where the driver was
positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data is recorded by the event data
recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and
Traffic, directions and Information
privacy below). However, parties,
such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder
data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an event
data recorder, special equipment
is required, and access to the
vehicle or the event data recorder
is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment,
can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the
event data recorder. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder
information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the
information independently of Ford
Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
10
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that
any law pertaining to Event Data
Recorders applies to SYNC or its
features, please note the following:
Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may,
through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in
a crash involving the deployment of
an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being
used to electronically or verbally
provide to 911 operators the vehicle
location (such as latitude and
longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not
want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 337).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information
(if equipped, U.S. only), the service
uses GPS technology and
advanced vehicle sensors to
collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and
speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide
you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches that
you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. Ford Motor Company and
the vendors it uses to provide you
with this information do not store
your vehicle travel information.
For more information, see Traffic,
Directions and Information, Terms
and Conditions. See MyLincoln
Touch™ (page 337).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained
in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
11
Introduction
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle
such as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control
batteries may contain perchlorate
material. Special handling may apply
for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. For more information vist:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN CREDIT
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
offers a full range of financing and
lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased
your vehicle through Lincoln
Automotive Financial Services, thank
you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a
number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
For more information regarding
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services,
as well as access Account Manager,
please go to www.LincolnAFS.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the
highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the
use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires
scheduled maintenance or repair. You
can clearly identify genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts by looking for the
Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding
on the parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make
sure that your vehicle provides years
of service is to have it maintained in
line with our recommendations using
parts that conform to the
specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision
parts meet our stringent requirements
for fit, finish, structural integrity,
corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection
as a whole system. A great way to
know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
12
Introduction
Warranty on Replacement
Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from
a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of the failure
of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Ford Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and
conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Manual that is provided to you along
with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is
fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. See
Supplementary Restraints System
(page 42).
Front seat mounted rear-facing
child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
MOBILE
COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications
equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business
and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or
others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications
can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used,
particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these
benefits. Mobile communication
equipment includes, but is not limited
to, cellular phones, pagers, portable
email devices, text messaging devices
and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. We strongly
recommend that you use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that
you comply with all applicable laws.
13
Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different
from the features and options that are
described in this Owner’s Manual. A
market unique supplement may be
supplied that complements this book.
By referring to the market unique
supplement, if provided, you can
properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications
that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Manual is written primarily
for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as
standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this
Owner’s Manual for all other
required information and
warnings.
14
Introduction
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for
directions on how to properly use
safety restraints for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that
is appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must
be bought separately from your
vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
death to your child.
All children are shaped
differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds from
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA
WARNINGS
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician and consult your
pediatrician to make sure your child
seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly
installed in your vehicle. To locate a
child seat fitting station and CPST,
contact the NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or locate NHTSA on
the internet. In Canada, check with
your local St. John Ambulance office
for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your
local St. John Ambulance office by
searching for St. John Ambulance on
the internet, or Transport Canada at
1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to
properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height,
age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
15
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by your child restraint
manufacturer).
Small chil-
dren
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a belt-posi-
tioning booster seat (generally chil-
dren who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45
m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg)
or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by
child restraint manufacturer).
Larger chil-
dren
16
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly
use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the United States and
Canada.
• Many states and provinces require
that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds
(36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for
specific requirements about the
safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children twelve years of
age and under in a rear seating
position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in
a front seating position. See Front
Passenger Sensing System
(page 45).
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child
in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move your vehicle seat all the
way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If
all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any
child restraint to determine if the
restraint device is appropriate for your
child's size, height, weight, or age.
Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and
warnings provided for installation and
use in conjunction with the
instructions and warnings provided by
your vehicle manufacturer. A safety
seat that is improperly installed or
utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does
not properly fit the child may increase
the risk of serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a
child on his or her lap while your
vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in
a collision, which may result in serious
injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or
towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the
likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
Always restrain an unoccupied
child seat or booster seat. These
objects may become projectiles in a
collision or sudden stop, which may
increase the risk of serious injury.
17
Child Safety
WARNINGS
Never place, or allow a child to
place, the shoulder belt under a
child's arm or behind the back
because it reduces the protection for
the upper part of the body and may
WARNINGS
increase the risk of injury or death in a
collision.
Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XChild
Weight
Restraint
Type
Safety
belt only
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt and
top tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XXUp to 48
lb (21 kg)
Rear
facing
child seat
XXXUp to 48
lb (21 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XXOver 48
lb (21 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against your vehicle seat. It may be
necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 131).
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to
place, the shoulder belt under a
child's arm or behind the back
because it reduces the protection for
the upper part of the body and may
increase the risk of injury or death in a
collision.
18
Child Safety
Note: Some booster seat safety belt
guides may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety
belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat
for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40
pounds (18 kilograms) and 80 pounds
(36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9
inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds
(36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you
can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a
booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against your vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across
the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on
the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in
conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
19
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low
seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your
child's head (as measured at the tops
of the ears) above the top of the seat.
In this case, move the backless
booster to another seating position
with a higher seat back or head
restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you
cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child's
head, a high back booster seat would
be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size
and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug
across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a
shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt
should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
20
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on your
vehicle seat, placing a rubberized
mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any
item thicker than this under the
booster seat. Check with the booster
seat manufacturer's instructions.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers, or children weighing 40
pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child
in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
Children 12 and under should be
properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure
a child restraint, and depending
on the child restraint design, you may
block access to certain safety belt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use
seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
21
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat
with combination lap and shoulder
belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place your vehicle seat back in the
upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the
automatic locking mode. See Step
5. This vehicle does not require the
use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat
illustrated is a forward facing child
seat, the steps are the same for
installing a rear facing child seat.
Standard safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety
seat in the proper seating position,
pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and
lap belt together behind the belt
tongue.
22
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap
belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest
to the direction the tongue is
coming from) for that seating
position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure
the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt
is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and
rear seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the
automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is in the automatic
locking mode (you should not be
able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle
the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
23
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with
extra weight, e.g., by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt. This is necessary to
remove the remaining slack that
will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve
the proper snugness of the child
seat to your vehicle. Sometimes, a
slight lean toward the buckle will
provide extra help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
seat is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat
forward and back to make sure
the seat is securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the
belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more
than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a
NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the
child restraint is properly installed. In
Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety
seat in the proper seating position,
grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together behind the belt
tongue.
24
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap
belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest
to the direction the tongue is
coming from) for that seating
position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure
the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
grasp the lap portion of the
inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled
out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and
rear seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt,
the inflatable safety belt's unique lap
portion locks the child seat for
installation. The ability for the shoulder
portion of the belt to move freely is
normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking
mode.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the
automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is in the automatic
locking mode (you should not be
able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle
the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
25
Child Safety
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with
extra weight, for example, by
pressing down or kneeling on the
child restraint while pulling down
on the lap belt in order to force
slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the
child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the
child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
seat is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat
forward and back to make sure
the seat is securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the
belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more
than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a
NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the
child restraint is properly installed. In
Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety
seats to the same anchor. In a
collision, one anchor may not be
strong enough to hold two child safety
seat attachments and may break,
causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure
a child restraint, and depending
on the child restraint design, you may
block access to certain safety belt
buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use
seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
26
Child Safety
The LATCH system is composed of
three vehicle anchor points: two lower
anchors located where your vehicle
seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats
have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two
lower anchors at the LATCH equipped
seating positions in your vehicle. This
type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety
belts to attach the child seat, however
the safety belt can still be used to
attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top
tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top
tether strap has been provided with
your child seat.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with the
child seat symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the
rear section of the rear seat between
the cushion and seat back below the
symbols as shown. Follow the child
seat manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety
seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of
the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors
from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for
LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches
(28 centimeters) center to center. Do
not use LATCH lower anchors for the
center seating position unless the
child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those
in this vehicle.
27
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18
inches (46 centimeters) apart. A child
seat with rigid LATCH attachments
cannot be installed at the center
seating position. LATCH compatible
child seats (with attachments on belt
webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the
child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing
stated. Do not attach a child seat to
any lower anchor if an adjacent child
seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat,
check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and
tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and
forward and back where it is secured
to your vehicle. The seat should move
less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first,
provided a proper installation is
achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child
safety seats include a tether
strap which extends from the
back of the child safety seat and
hooks to an anchoring point called the
top tether anchor. Tether straps are
available as an accessory for many
older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap
on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your
vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH
system, or both, you can attach the
top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install
a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
28
Child Safety
Note: If you install a child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift
the child seat off your vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it.
Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching
your vehicle seat gives the best
protection in a severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether
strap over the back of the seat. For
outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether
strap over the top of the head
restraint. If needed, the head
restraints can also be removed.
E144274
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then
open the tether anchor cover.
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor
as shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
If your child restraint system is
equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
29
Child Safety
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
30
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can
be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a
child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger
cannot protect the child from injury in
a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should
always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is
provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNINGS
Each seating position in your
vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one
buckle and one tongue that are
designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use
the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck
over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use
a single belt for more than one person.
When possible, all children 12
years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
Safety belts and seats can
become hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather; they
could burn a small child. Check seat
covers and buckles before you place
a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle
have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should
always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is
provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with
automatic locking mode, (except
driver safety belt).
31
Safety Belts
• Height adjuster at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the
front outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating
position.
• Safety belt warning light and
chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the
front seating positions are designed
to tighten the safety belts when
activated. In frontal and near-frontal
collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone
or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front
airbags. The pretensioners may also
activate when a side curtain airbag is
deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable
belts similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest
to the direction the tongue is
coming from) until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue
from the buckle.
32
Safety Belts
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety
belt properly fastened. The lap portion
of the safety belt should fit snug and
be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt
should be positioned across the chest.
Pregnant women should also follow
this practice. See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear
their safety belt. The lap belt portion
of a combination lap and shoulder
belt should be positioned low across
the hips below the belly and worn as
tight as comfort will allow. The
shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and
the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle collision, the
safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be
checked by an authorized dealer to
verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all
safety belts should be checked for
proper function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR
ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not
operating properly when checked by
an authorized dealer. Failure to
replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of
injury in collisions.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
The driver safety belt has the first type
of locking mode, and the front
outboard passenger and rear seat
safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
33
Safety Belts
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode,
which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver
brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an
impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination
safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed
to lock if the webbing is pulled out too
quickly. If this occurs, let the belt
retract slightly and pull webbing out
again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt
will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the
driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic
Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a
child safety seat, except a booster, is
installed in passenger front or rear
seating positions. Children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety
(page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety
belts (second row only–if
equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
34
Safety Belts
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt
and pull upward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the
safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the
automatic locking mode and activate
the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair,
or modify the rear inflatable
safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are
fitted in the shoulder portion of the
safety belts of the second-row
outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts
are compatible with most infant and
child safety car seats and belt
positioning booster seats when
properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas
at a lower pressure and at a slower rate
than traditional airbags. After inflation,
the shoulder portion of the safety belt
remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists
of the following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with
automatic locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various
parts of the vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable safety
belt system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will
function like standard restraints in
everyday usage.
E146364
During a collision of sufficient force,
the inflatable belt will inflate from
inside the webbing.
35
Safety Belts
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased
diameter more effectively holds the
occupant in the appropriate seating
position, and spreads crash forces
over more area of the body than
regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps
control head and neck motion for
passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt
has deployed, it will not function
again. The rear inflatable safety belt
system must be replaced by an
authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal collisions and some side
impact collisions. The fact that the
rear inflatable safety belt did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
Safety Belt Extension
Assembly
WARNINGS
Position the safety belt height
adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt
properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when
fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by
the same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located
at the end of the webbing on the label.
A safety belt extension is not available
for the inflatable safety belt. Also, use
the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when
fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt
properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
36
Safety Belts
E146191
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt
so the belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down. Release the
button and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING
LAMP AND INDICATOR
CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if
the driver's safety belt has
not been fastened when the vehicle's
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illumin-
ates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
37
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the safety
belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the
safety belt warning light when the
driver's or front passenger's seat is
occupied and the safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating
the Belt-Minder feature for objects
placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to front
seat occupants as determined by the
front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately
five minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.
The driver's and front passenger's
safety belts are buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on
position or less than 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and the warning chime sounds
for six seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for approximately five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety
belt is not buckled when the vehicle
has reached at least 6 mph (9.7 km/
h) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been turned to
on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and the warning chime sounds
for six seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for approximately five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety
belt becomes unbuckled for approxim-
ately one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h)
and more than 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...
38
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is
designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
accident. We recommend you leave
the system activated for yourself and
others who may use the vehicle. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate or activate the system
while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warning are deactivated and activated
independently. When deactivating or
activating one seating position, do not
buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the deactivation or
activation programming procedure.
The system can be deactivated or
activated by performing the following
procedure:
Before following the procedure, make
sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the transmission selector lever is
in position P (automatic
transmission) or N (manual
transmission)
• the ignition is off
• the driver and front passenger
safety belts are unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT
START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning
light turns off (approximately one
minute). After Step 2, wait an
additional five seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once Step
3 is started, the procedure must be
completed within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position being
disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a
moderate speed, ending in the
unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light will turn
on.
4. While the safety belt warning light
is on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety
belt warning light will flash for
confirmation.
• This will disable the feature for
that seating position if it is
currently enabled.
• This will enable the feature for that
seating position if it is currently
disabled.
39
Safety Belts
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and
child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and
are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle
and child seat safety belts to make
sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
back (if equipped), rear inflatable
safety belts (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for additional inspection
and maintenance information specific
to the child restraint. Ford Motor
Company recommends that all safety
belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced.
However, if the collision was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that
the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do
not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See
Vehicle Care (page 284).
40
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides
an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat
occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is
able to analyze different occupant
conditions and crash severity before
activating the appropriate safety
devices to help better protect a range
of occupants in a variety of frontal
crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy
management retractors (first row
only), and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on
indicator lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module with
impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the
airbags, crash sensor(s), safety
belt pretensioners, front safety belt
usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing
system, and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can
adapt the deployment strategy of
your vehicle’s safety devices
according to crash severity and
occupant conditions. A collection of
crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control
Module. During a crash, the Restraints
Control Module may activate the
safety belt pretensioners and may
activate either one or both stages of
the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and
occupant conditions.
41
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly
or gently, and the risk of injury
from a deploying airbag is the greatest
close to the trim covering the airbag
module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should
always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is
provided.
Always transport children 12
years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use
appropriate child restraints.
Never place your arm over the
airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm
fractures or other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child
in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair,
or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its
fuses. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Several airbag system
components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after
inflation.
WARNINGS
If the airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If
the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
The airbags are a supplemental
restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help
protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and
see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is
normal.
42
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist
of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (e.g., baking soda) that
result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is
toxic. While the system is designed to
help reduce serious injuries, contact
with a deploying airbag may also
cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a
possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly
and with considerable force, there is
the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye
injuries or internal injuries, particularly
to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag
module as possible while maintaining
vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags
is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT
SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal
lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a
serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt
pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is
pressed
• the panic button (if equipped) is
pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
• your vehicle runs out of power.
Spin out Detection
If a spinout is detected and the hazard
warning flashers come on, the
message Spinout Detected Hazards
Activated will appear on the
instrument cluster.
Once the hazard warning flashers
have been activated, they can be
turned off by:
• pressing the hazard warning
flasher button.
• pressing the remote control unlock
button.
• pressing the remote control panic
button.
• cycling the ignition on and off
twice.
43
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any
objects over an airbag module.
Placing your arm over a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm
fractures or other injuries. Objects
placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face
and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child
in a child seat. Never place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
will deploy during significant frontal
and near frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag
modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and
monitoring system with
readiness indicator. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Proper Driver and Front
Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of
at least 10 in. (25 cm) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away
from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far
as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or
two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on safety belts, it’ s
very important that they continue to
sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet
comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one
or both feet up, the chance of injury
during a crash is greatly increased.
44
Supplementary Restraints System
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child
in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest
that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in the front seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
KNEE AIRBAG
The driver's and passenger's knee
airbags are located under the
instrument panel. The system works
along with the driver's and
passenger's front airbags to help
reduce injury to the legs. When the
airbags activate in a collision, the knee
airbags deploy from under the
instrument panel. As with front and
side airbags, it is important to be
properly seated and restrained to
reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Make sure the knee airbags
are operating properly. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
FRONT PASSENGER
SENSING SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position.
Sitting improperly out of position
or with the seat back reclined too
far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the
front passenger sensing system,
resulting in serious injury or death in a
crash. Always sit upright against your
seat back, with your feet on the floor.
45
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Any alteration or modification to
the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system.
This system works with sensors that
are part of the front passenger’s seat
and safety belt to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
E151849
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which will illuminate
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled)
or OFF (disabled). The indicator lamp
is located at the top center of the
instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status
indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps
will illuminate for a short period of time
when the ignition is first turned on to
confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system
is designed to disable (will not inflate)
the front passenger's frontal airbag
when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied, or a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint,
or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are
STRONGLY encouraged to always
properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag,
the passenger airbag status
indicator will illuminate the OFF
lamp and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been
installed and the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the ON
lamp, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system
is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger's frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly
in the front passenger seat.
46
Supplementary Restraints System
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front
passenger frontal airbag (may
inflate), the passenger airbag
status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, but the airbag
off indicator lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person isn’t sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat back in
the full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’ s legs comfortably
extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow
the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal
airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains
lit even after this, the person
should be advised to ride in the
rear seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag
status indicator OFF light is illuminated,
the passenger (seat mounted) side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the
risk of airbag deployment injuries.
47
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on safety belts, it’ s
very important that they continue to
sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet
comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one
or both feet up, the chance of injury
during a crash is greatly increased.
The conditions listed above may
cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted
by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier
or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
To know if the front
passenger sensing system is
operating properly, See
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
DO NOT attempt to repair or service
the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an
advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need
(page 243).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seat backs
(of the front seats), or in front seat
areas that may come into contact
with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase
the risk of personal injury in the event
of a collision.
Do not use accessory seat
covers. The use of accessory
seat covers may prevent the
deployment of the side airbags and
increase the risk of injury in an
accident.
Do not lean your head on the
door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair,
or modify the airbag, its fuses or
the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed,
the airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
48
Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seat backs of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions,
the airbag on the side affected by the
collision will be inflated. The airbag
was designed to inflate between the
door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are
fitted to your vehicle
• Side airbags located inside the
driver and front passenger seat
backs
• Front passenger sensing system
·Crash sensors and
monitoring system with
readiness indicator. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Note: The passenger sensing system
will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects
an empty, unbuckled passenger seat.
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the
headliner at the siderail that may
come into contact with a deploying
side curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of
a collision.
Do not lean your head on the
door. The side curtain airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair,
or modify the side curtain
airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar
trim, or the headliner on a vehicle
containing side curtain airbags.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
All occupants of the vehicle
including the driver should
always wear their safety belts even
when an airbag SRS and side curtain
airbag is provided.
49
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the side curtain
airbag.
If the side curtain airbags have
deployed, the side curtain
airbags will not function again. The
side curtain airbags (including the A,
B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the side curtain
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The side curtain airbags will deploy
during significant side collisions. The
side curtain airbags are mounted to
the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain lateral collisions, the
side curtain airbags on the impacted
side of the vehicle will be activated.
The side curtain airbags are designed
to inflate between the side window
area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side
impact collisions.
The system consists of the following:
E75004
• Side curtain airbags fitted above
the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner
or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens
above the side doors to allow side
air curtain deployment.
Crash sensors and
monitoring system with
readiness indicator. See
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 51).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the
back seats. The side curtain airbags
will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed
child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from
the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the
side curtain airbags included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side curtain airbags.
50
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment
to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end
body structure and tow hooks) may
affect the performance of the airbag
system, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
The vehicle has a collection of crash
and occupant sensors which provide
information to the Restraints Control
Module which deploys (activates) the
front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, knee
airbag(s), seat mounted side airbags,
and the side curtain airbags. Based on
the type of collision (frontal impact
or side impact), the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and
occupant sensors. The readiness of
the safety system is indicated by a
warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or by a backup tone
if the warning light is not working.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the
following:
· The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
the ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash
or stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard.
The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem, the
light or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an
authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
The safety belt pretensioners and the
front airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when
the vehicle sustains longitudinal
deceleration sufficient to cause the
restraints control module to deploy a
safety device.
The fact that the safety belt
pretensioners or front airbags did not
activate for both front seat occupants
in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control
module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage,
etc.) were not appropriate to activate
these safety devices.
51
Supplementary Restraints System
• Front airbags are designed to
activate only in frontal and
near-frontal collisions (not
rollovers, side impacts or rear
impacts) unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, and may
also activate when a side curtain
deploys.
• A knee airbag deploys from under
the instrument panel when the
front airbag activates in a collision.
• Side airbags and side curtain
airbags are designed to inflate in
side-impact collisions, not
rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
52
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION
ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote
start feature will have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
The radio frequency used by your
remote control can also be used by
other short distance radio
transmissions, for example amateur
radios, medical equipment, wireless
headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use
your remote control. You can lock and
unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote
control will operate if you press any
button unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency
signal to communicate with your
vehicle and authorize your vehicle to
unlock when one of the following
conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle.
• You press the luggage
compartment button.
• You press a button on the
transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency
interference is present in the area or
if the transmitter battery is low, you
may need to mechanically unlock your
door. You can use the mechanical key
blade in your intelligent access key to
open the driver door in this situation.
See Remote Control (page 54).
53
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E144506
Your vehicle is equipped with two
intelligent access keys which operate
the power locks and the remote start
system. The key must be in the vehicle
to activate the push button start
system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also
contains a removable mechanical key
blade that can be used to unlock the
driver door.
E151796
Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off
to access the key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’ s backup keys were
issued with a security tag that provides
important vehicle key cut information.
Keep the tag in a safe place for future
reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not
delete the transmitter from the vehicle.
The transmitter should operate
normally.
A message will appear in the
information display when the remote
control battery is low. See
Information Messages (page 105).
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two
coin-type three-volt lithium batteries
CR2025 or equivalent.
54
Keys and Remote Controls
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover
off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist
to separate the housing.
E153891
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the +
facing each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will
flash. It is recommended that this
method be used to locate your
vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only
operate when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate
the alarm. Press the button
again or turn the ignition on
to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not
use remote start if your vehicle
is parked indoors or areas that are not
well ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your
vehicle is low on fuel.
E138625
Your vehicle has remote start
if the transmitter has this
button.
55
Keys and Remote Controls
The remote start feature allows you
to start the vehicle from outside the
vehicle. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate
control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is remote started.
See Climate Control (page 126). A
manual climate control system will
run at the setting it was set to when
the vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system will not work
if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• the feature has been disabled
• the hood is not closed
• two remote vehicle starts have
already been attempted within the
last hour
• the vehicle is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too
low
• the service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control
provides status feedback of remote
start or stop commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful;
engine off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for
status update
Blinking green
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: Each button press must be done
within three seconds of each other. The
vehicle will not remote start if this
sequence is not followed and the horn
will not chirp.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details
the starting procedure. To remote
start the vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button
twice. The exterior lamps will flash
twice.
56
Keys and Remote Controls
The horn will chirp if the system fails
to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet
start will run the blower fan at a
slower speed to reduce noise. It can
be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Note: If the vehicle has been remote
started and is equipped with an
integrated keyhead transmitter, you
must turn the ignition on before driving
the vehicle. If equipped with an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the START/STOP button on the
instrument panel once while applying
the brake pedal before driving the
vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited
during the remote start and the radio
will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and
the engine will run for 5, 10, or 15
minutes, depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle
still running to extend the run time for
another remote start duration. If you
programmed the duration to last 10
minutes, the second 10 minutes will
begin after what is left of the first
activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the
vehicle will continue to run now for a
total of 15 minutes. You can only
extend the remote start once.
Wait at least five seconds before
remote starting after a vehicle
shutdown. Only two remote starts are
allowed.
The ignition must be turned on and
then back off or allow one hour to
pass before using remote start again
if additional remote starts are desired.
Turning the Vehicle Off After
Remote Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to
the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise
of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote
start system through the information
display. See General Information
(page 100).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or
remote controls can be purchased
from your authorized dealer. Your
dealer can program the transmitters
to your vehicle or you may be able to
program them yourself. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 72).
57
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys
with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but
one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these
restricted modes. Any keys that have
not been programmed are referred to
as an "administrator key" or "admin
key" which can be used to:
• create a restricted key
• program optional MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features
altogether.
Once a key has been programmed you
can access the following information
using the information display control:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys
are programmed to the vehicle.
• The total distance the vehicle has
been driven with a MyKey.
For vehicles equipped with intelligent
access key (push button start), when
both a MyKey and an admin intelligent
access key (fob) are present, the
admin fob will be recognized by the
vehicle to start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
• Belt-Minder®. This cannot be
disabled and the five-minute timer
does not expire. The audio system
is muted when MyKey
Belt-Minder® is activated.
• Early low fuel. Warnings are
displayed in the information
display control followed by an
audible tone when the fuel tank is
at one-eighth tank or less.
• Driver assist features, if equipped
on your vehicle, are forced on: Rear
parking aid, Blind spot information
system (BLIS®) with cross traffic
alert, Lane departure warning,
Forward collision warning system
and Satellite radio adult content
restriction.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right
after a MyKey is first created or
changed afterward with an admin key.
• Vehicle speed limit of 65, 70, 75
and 80 mph (105, 113, 121 and 130
km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by an audible
tone when vehicle speed has
reached the selected top speed.
• Vehicle speed minder of 45, 55 or
65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed
followed by an audible tone when
the preselected vehicle speed is
exceeded.
58
MyKey®
• Audio system maximum volume
of 45%. A message in the audio
system is displayed when
attempting to exceed the limited
volume. Also, speed sensitive
compensated volume feature will
be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected you will not be able to
disable AdvanceTrac®, 911 Assist®
or the Do not disturb feature (if
your vehicle is equipped with these
features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display control to
create a MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program
into the ignition or, if the vehicle is
equipped with push button start,
put the intelligent access key in the
backup slot. Backup slot
information is located in a different
chapter. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 150).
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls and
select Settings, then MyKey by
pressing OK or the > button.
4. Press OK to select Create.
5. When prompted, hold the OK
button until you see a message
informing you to label this key as
a MyKey. The key will be restricted
at the next start.
The key is successfully programmed.
Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can program optional settings for
the key(s). Refer to
Programming/Changing optional
settings.
Programming/Changing
Optional Settings
All programmed keys can be cleared
within the same key cycle in which a
key was programmed, otherwise an
admin key is required to clear the keys.
See Clearing All MyKeys (page 59).
You can access the optional settings
through the information display
control.
1. Turn the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an
optional feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through
settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
All programmed MyKeys can be
cleared within the same key cycle in
which a MyKey was created,
otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys.
59
MyKey®
To clear all MyKeys (which removes
all restrictions and returns them to
admin key status), use the
information display to do the
following:
1. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the
OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
The information display control
displays information about keys
programmed to the vehicle:
• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage
when a restricted key is used. If
mileage does not accumulate as
expected, then the key is not being
used by the intended user. The
only way to reset this to zero is by
clearing MyKeys. If the mileage is
lower than the last time you
checked, then the key system has
been recently reset.
• #MYKEY(S): Indicates how many
restricted keys are programmed to
the vehicle. Can also be used to
detect deletion of a restricted key.
• #ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how
many admin keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to
detect if an additional key has
been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH
REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with
non-Ford-approved aftermarket
remote start systems. If you choose
to install a remote start system please
see your Ford authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
60
MyKey®
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key in the ignition does not have
admin privileges.
I cannot program a key.
· The key in the ignition is the only
admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
· The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push-
button start).
· SecuriLock® passive anti-theft
system is disabled or in unlimited
mode.
· The key in the ignition does not have
admin privileges. I cannot program the
optional settings.
I cannot program the optional settings.
· No keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page
59).
· The key in the ignition does not have
admin privileges.
I cannot clear the restricted keys.
· No restricted keys are programmed
to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey
(page 59).
· Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 72).
I lost a key.
· An admin fob is present at engine
start-up.
No restricted key functions with intelli-
gent access key (push-button start).
· No MyKey keys are programmed to
the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey
(page 59).
· The MyKey key is not being used by
the intended user.
MyKey miles do not accumulate.
· The key system has been reset.
61
MyKey®
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock
control or the remote control to lock
and unlock your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the
driver and front passenger door
panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim will
light when you lock the door. It will
remain lit for up to 10 minutes after
you switch off the ignition.
Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your
vehicle, the power door lock switch
and interior trunk release switch will
no longer operate after 20 seconds.
You must unlock your vehicle with the
remote control or keyless keypad, or
switch the ignition on, to restore
function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door release handle
twice to unlock and open the rear
door. The first pull unlocks the door
and the second pull will unlatch the
door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time. The luggage compartment
release button only works when your
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8
km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock
the driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
turn signals will flash.
62
Locks
Press and hold both the lock and
unlock buttons on the remote control
for three seconds to change between
driver door or all doors unlock mode.
The turn signals will flash twice to
indicate a change to the unlocking
mode. Driver door unlock mode will
only unlock the driver door when the
unlock button is pressed once. All
door unlock mode unlocks all doors
with one press of the unlock button.
The unlocking mode applies to the
remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access. You can also
change the mode in the information
display. See General Information
(page 100).
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
the doors. The turn signals
will illuminate.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again,
the horn will chirp and the turn signals
will illuminate if all the doors and the
luggage compartment are closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is not closed, or if the
hood is not closed on vehicles
equipped with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will chirp twice
and the lamps will not flash. You can
enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Opening the Luggage
Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three
seconds to open the luggage
compartment.
Make sure the luggage compartment
is closed and latched before driving
your vehicle. An unlatched luggage
compartment may cause objects to
fall out or block your view.
Activating Intelligent Access
You must have the intelligent access
key within 3 feet (1 meter) of your
vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. Make sure not to
touch the lock sensor on top of the
handle.
E146044
Touch the top of the door handle to
lock your vehicle.
63
Locks
At the Luggage Compartment
E144402
Press the exterior release button
hidden above the license plate.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent
access key inside your vehicle’s
passenger compartment or rear cargo
area.
When you electronically lock your
vehicle using the driver or passenger
power door lock control (with any
door open, vehicle in park and ignition
off), your vehicle will search for an
intelligent access key in the passenger
compartment after you close the last
door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of
the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn will chirp twice, indicating
that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your
vehicle. To do this, lock your vehicle
after all doors are closed by:
• using the keyless entry keypad
• pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key
• touching the locking area on the
handle with another intelligent
access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors
and lock your vehicle using the power
door lock control, all doors will lock
then unlock if:
• the ignition is on, or
• the ignition is off and your vehicle
is not in P.
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a
door within 45 seconds, your vehicle
will lock and the alarm will arm. You
can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature will lock all the
doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion, and
• your vehicle attains a speed
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
64
Locks
The autolock feature repeats when:
• you open then close any door while
the ignition is on and your vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower,
and
• your vehicle then attains a speed
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all
the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
in motion at a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h);
• your vehicle comes to a stop and
you switch the ignition off or to
accessory; and
• you open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition
off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if
you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off and
before you open the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the
autolock and autounlock features
independently of each other.
You can enable or disable these
features in the information display or
your authorized dealer can do it for
you. See General Information (page
100).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when you unlock
the doors with the remote entry
system.
The illuminated entry system will turn
off the lights if:
• the ignition is on,
• you press the remote control lock
button, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• you turn them on with the dimmer
control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when all doors
are closed and you switch the ignition
off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse
• you press the START/STOP
button.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome
lamps or headlamps on, the battery
saver will shut them off 10 minutes
after you switch the ignition off.
65
Locks
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you switch off the engine and leave
the ignition in the on or accessory
mode, the ignition will shut off after
30 minutes.
Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel to unlatch
the trunk.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E144402
Press the release button above the
license plate to unlatch the trunk.
Your vehicle must be unlocked or have
an intelligent access transmitter
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk.
Power Decklid (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear
of the power decklid area before
using the power decklid control.
Keep keys out of the reach of
children. Do not allow children
to operate the power decklid, or to
play near to an open or moving power
decklid.
Note: Do not drive with the decklid
open unless you disable the power
feature. Make sure you secure the
decklid to you vehicle.
The power decklid can be enabled or
disabled using the information display.
The remote control and instrument
panel button will still operate the
decklid regardless of the setting.
Opening and Closing the Power
Decklid
Note: The decklid movement can be
reversed. Press of the instrument panel
or decklid button again, or press the
remote control button twice.
The decklid will only operate with your
vehicle in P.
If the decklid reverses or starts to
close after an open request, you will
hear a fast continuous chime. This
indicates excessive load on the
decklid or a possible torsion bar
failure. See your authorized dealer if
you still have a fast chime after you
remove the load.
66
Locks
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three
seconds.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E144402
Press the control button located
above the license plate. Your vehicle
must be unlocked or have the
intelligent access transmitter within
3 feet (1 meter) of the decklid to open
it.
Note: Let the power system operate
the decklid after pressing the control.
Pushing or pulling the decklid may
activate the obstacle detection feature
and stop the power operation.
Obstacle Detection
The decklid will reverse to full open if
it detects an obstacle while closing.
Three chimes will sound as the decklid
begins to reopen. Remove the
obstacle to close the decklid.
Note: Before driving off, check the
instrument cluster for a truck ajar or
door ajar message or warning indicator.
Driving off without first checking for the
decklid or door ajar message or
indicator could result in the decklid
being left open, unintentionally, while
you are driving.
The decklid will stop and three chimes
will sound if it detects an obstacle
while opening. Remove the obstacle
to operate the decklid.
Resetting the Power Decklid
The decklid may not operate properly
and may need to be reset if:
• the battery is dead or has low
voltage
• you disconnect the battery
• you manually close the decklid and
leave it unlatched.
To reset the power decklid:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20
seconds then reconnect the
battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the
decklid.
3. Power open the decklid using the
remote control or instrument panel
button.
67
Locks
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS
ENTRY KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver’s
window. It is invisible until touched
and then it lights up so you can see
and touch the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too
fast on the keypad, the unlock function
may not work. Re-enter your entry code
more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors
• release the trunk
• recall memory seat and mirror
positions
• program and erase user codes
• arm and disarm the anti-theft
alarm.
The keypad can be operated with the
factory set 5-digit entry code. The
code is located on the owner’s wallet
card in the glove box and is available
from your authorized dealer. You can
also create up to five of your own
5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry
Code
To create your own personal entry
code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code.
Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to
confirm that your personal entry code
has been programmed.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step
4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal
entry code through the MyLincoln
Touch system. See Settings (page
351).
68
Locks
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of
the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in
sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even
if you have set your own personal
code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes will
recall driver memory positions as
follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1
memory positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2
memory positions.
• Entry code 3 will recall driver 3
memory positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5
will not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the
keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two
seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased
and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan
mode if the wrong code has been
entered seven times (35 consecutive
button presses). This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off
after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
• the ignition is switched on
• unlocking the vehicle using
intelligent access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver’s Door
Enter the factory set 5-digit code or
your personal code. Each number
must be pressed within five seconds
of each other. The interior lamps will
illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the all
door unlocking mode is enabled. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 62).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory set code or your
personal code, then press 3·4 within
five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the
same time (with the driver’s door
closed). You do not need to enter the
keypad code first.
69
Locks
To Release the Trunk
Enter the factory set code or your
personal code, then press 5·6 within
five seconds.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys
for this procedure.
To display the factory set code in the
information display:
1. Place the first programmed key in
the backup slot at the bottom of
the cupholder (after removing the
rubber cover).
2. Press the START/STOP button
once and wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button
again and remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key
into the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until
after any other warning messages first
display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep
keys and remote transmitters out of
a child’s reach. Unsupervised children
could lock themselves in the trunk and
risk injury. Children should be taught
not to play in vehicles.
Do not leave children, unreliable
adults, or animals unattended in
the vehicle. On hot days, the
temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure
of people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious
heat-related injuries, including brain
damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
release handle that provides a means
of escape for children and adults if
they become locked inside the
luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves
with the operation and location of the
release handle.
70
Locks
E144403
The handle is located inside the
luggage compartment either on the
luggage compartment door (lid) or
near the tail lamps. It is composed of
a material that will glow for hours in
darkness following brief exposure to
ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the
luggage compartment door (lid) to
open from within the luggage
compartment.
71
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible
with non-Ford aftermarket remote start
systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and
a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic
devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle
starting problems if they are too close
to the key when starting the engine.
Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects
on the key chain away from the coded
key and restart the engine if a problem
occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded
key in the vehicle. Always take your
keys and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine
immobilization system. It is designed
to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key
programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine
with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a
message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded
key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped
with two intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions
as a programmed key that operates
the driver door lock and activates the
intelligent access with push button
start system, as well as a remote
control.
If your programmed transmitters are
lost or stolen and you do not have an
extra coded key, you will need to have
your vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer. The key codes need to be
erased from your vehicle and new
coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away
from the vehicle in a safe place to help
prevent any inconveniences. See your
authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum
for four intelligent access keys to your
vehicle.
72
Security
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys
inside the vehicle and the new
unprogrammed intelligent access keys
readily accessible. See your
authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that the vehicle is off
before beginning this procedure. Make
sure that all doors are closed before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Perform all
steps within 30 seconds of starting
the sequence. Stop and wait for at
least one minute before starting again
if any steps are performed out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire
procedure before you begin.
1. Place a programmed intelligent
access key in the backup slot at
the bottom of the cupholder (after
removing the rubber covering).
2. Wait 5 seconds, then press the
START/STOP button.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the
START/STOP button.
5. Wait 5 seconds, then press the
START/STOP button again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Wait 5 seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access
key in the backup slot and press
the START/STOP button.
The intelligent access key is now
programmed. Verify the remote
control functions operate and the
vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If it was not programmed successfully,
wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1
through 7. If you are still unsuccessful,
take your vehicle to your authorized
dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF
EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It
will be triggered if any door, the
luggage compartment or the hood is
opened without using the key, remote
control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and
the horn will sound if unauthorized
entry is attempted while the alarm is
armed.
Take all remote controls to an
authorized dealer if there is any
potential alarm problem with your
vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there
is not a key in the ignition.
Electronically lock the vehicle to arm
the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the
following actions:
73
Security
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to
unlock the vehicle, then switch the
ignition on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and
signal indicators, but will not disarm
the system.
74
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in
the correct position. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 131).
2
2
1
E157083
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
E157084
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope
Steering Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in
the correct position. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 131).
E145975
Use the control on the side of the
steering column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• tilt: use the top or bottom of the
control
• telescope: use the front or rear of
the control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column will move to the full up
and in position when the ignition is
turned off and this feature is activated
through the information display. The
column will return to the previous
setting when the ignition is turned on.
75
Steering Wheel
Memory Feature
The steering column positions are
saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled with the
memory feature. Refer to the Seats
chapter.
Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall will cancel the
operation. The column will respond
to the adjustment control.
The steering column is designed to
set a stopping position just short of
the end of the column position to
prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position will
be set if the steering column
encounters an object while tilting.
To reset the steering column to its
normal stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control
again after encountering the new
stopping position.
2. Continue pressing the control until
it reaches the end of the column
position.
A new stopping position will be set.
The steering column will stop just
short of the end of the column
position the next time it is tilted.
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
E145979
Volume upA
Volume downB
Seek up or nextC
Seek down or previousD
MuteE
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or
previous stored preset
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station
up or down the frequency band
• seek through a track.
76
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
E145980
Voice recognitionA
End a callB
Answer a callC
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 337).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E145976
Type 2
E145977
See Cruise Control (page 195).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E145981
See Information Displays (page 100).
Cluster Display Control
Features
E145982
77
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield
before switching on the windshield
wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers
are switched off before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that doesn't resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a
dry windshield. This may scratch the
glass, damage the wiper blades or
cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washers
before wiping a dry windshield.
E144495
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
E144496
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases,
the interval between wipes will
decrease.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield
before switching on the windshield
wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers
are switched off before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that doesn't resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
79
Wipers and Washers
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low
beam headlamps will illuminate
automatically when the rain sensor
activates the windshield wipers
continuously.
Note: Wet road conditions can cause
unexpected wiping or smearing.
To reduce smearing we recommend
the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the
autowipers.
• Switch to normal or high speed
wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
E144497
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The wipers will function when
moisture is detected on the
windshield. The rain sensor will
continue to monitor the amount of
moisture on the windshield and adjust
the speed of the wipers automatically.
This feature can be switched on or off
in the information display. See
General Information (page 100).
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. With low
sensitivity, the wipers will operate
when the sensor detects a large
amount of moisture on the windshield.
With high sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a
small amount of moisture on the
windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield
clean. Sensor performance will be
affected if the area around the interior
mirror is dirty. The rain sensor is very
sensitive and the wipers may operate
if dirt, mist or flies hit the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers
when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to
overheat.
E144498
The washers will spray for as long as
you pull the lever toward you. When
you release the lever, the wipers will
operate for a short time.
80
Wipers and Washers
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument
panel lamps, license plate
lamps and tail lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
E130140
Push the lever forward to switch the
high beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the
high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
E142450
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: It may be necessary to switch
your headlamps on manually in severe
weather conditions.
E142451
The headlamps will switch on and off
automatically in low light situations
or during inclement weather.
82
Lighting
The headlamps will remain on for a
period of time after you switch the
ignition off. You can adjust the time
delay using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page ?).
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, low beam
headlamps will illuminate
automatically when the rain sensor
activates the windshield wipers
continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect
the battery, or fully discharge and
charge the battery, the illuminated
components will switch to the
maximum setting.
A B
A
E142452
Press repeatedly or press
and hold to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press
and hold to brighten.
B
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you
can switch the headlamps on by
pulling the direction indicator lever
toward you. You will hear a short tone.
The headlamps will switch off
automatically after three minutes with
any door open or 30 seconds after the
last door has been closed. You can
cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again
or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light
situations or during inclement
weather. The system does not
activate the tail lamps and may not
provide adequate lighting during these
conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions
may result in a collision.
The system switches the signature
lamps on in day light conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
ignition on, and switch the lighting
control to the off, autolamp, or
parking lamp position.
83
Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will automatically turn on
your high beams if it is dark enough
and no other traffic is present. When
it detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlights, a preceding vehicle’s tail
lamps or street lighting, the system
will turn off the high beams before
they distract other drivers. The low
beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic
control of the high beams is not
functioning properly, check the
windshield in front of the camera for
blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation.
Any windshield damage in the area of
the camera field-of-view should be
repaired.
Note: If a blockage is detected (e.g.
bird dropping, bug splatter, snow, or
ice) and no changes are observed, the
system will go into low beam mode
until the blockage is cleared. A
message may also appear in the
instrument cluster display noting the
front camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the automatic high
beam system’ s performance. However,
in cold or inclement weather
conditions, the automatic high beam
system's availability may be decreased.
If you want to change the beam state
independently of the system, you may
turn the high beams ON or OFF using
the multifunction switch lever.
Automatic control will resume when
conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride
height (e.g. using much larger tires)
may degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor is centrally mounted
behind the windshield of the vehicle,
and monitors conditions continuously
to decide when to switch the high
beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high
beams will switch on if:
• The ambient light level is low
enough that high beams are
needed.
• There is no traffic in front of the
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The high beams will switch off if:
• An approaching vehicle's
headlights or a preceding vehicle's
tail lamps are detected.
• Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph
(25 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high
enough that high beams are not
required.
84
Lighting
• Severe rain, snow, or fog is
detected.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the
information display and autolamps.
See Information Displays (page ?).
See Autolamps (page 82).
E142451
Turn the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Manually Overriding the
System
E130140
Use the lever to switch between the
high beams and the low beams.
Note: This is a temporary override and
the system will return to automatic
operation after a short period.
To permanently deactivate the
system, use the information display
menu or turn the lighting control
switch from autolamps to headlamps.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E130141
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to
make the direction indicators flash
three times to indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when one of
the following conditions have been
met:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You touch switch A on the front
interior lamp.
85
Lighting
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp switches
are on the overhead console. The exact
location of each switch on the
overhead console depends upon which
roof, sunroof, and window shade
features are equipped on the vehicle.
Note: Touch switch C to switch the
door function off when you open any
door. The indicator lamp will illuminate
amber when the door function is off.
When the door function is off and you
open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps will stay off. Touch switch C
again to switch the door function back
on. The indicator lamp will illuminate
white when the door function is on.
When the door function is on and you
open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps will switch on.
A B
C
E146410
All lamps on switchA
Door function switchB
All lamps off switchC
You can switch individual front map
lamps on independently by touching
a map lens.
Rear Interior Lamp
E150100
The rear interior lamps are hidden in
the headliner. You can switch
individual rear interior lamps on
independently by waving your hand
near the small white light in the
headliner.
86
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and
do not let them play with the power
windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power
windows, you should verify they
are free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise
when just one of the windows are open.
Lower the opposite window slightly to
reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it.
Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the
window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the
way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back
Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold
within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position.
The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window
will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the
rear window controls. It will illuminate
when the rear window controls are
locked.
87
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either
front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can use the remote control to
operate the windows with the ignition
off.
Note: You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display or
see an authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 100).
Note: To operate this feature,
accessory delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a
short time after you unlock your
vehicle with the remote control. After
you unlock your vehicle, press and
hold the remote control unlock button
to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they
are free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof,
press and hold the remote control
lock button. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when
your vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirrorA
Adjustment controlB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to
adjust. The control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
88
Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door
window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when
returning it to its original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors
(page 128).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory
function. See Memory Function
(page 135).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s exterior mirror will
automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate
mirror housing will blink when the turn
signal is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors
(If Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror
are closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior
mirrors. They are designed to increase
your visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a
lane change, then check the blind spot
mirror. If no vehicles are present in the
blind spot mirror and the traffic in the
adjacent lane is at a safe distance,
signal that you intend to change lanes.
Glance over your shoulder to verify
traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
89
Windows and Mirrors
The image of the approaching vehicle
is small and near the inboard edge of
the main mirror when it is at a
distance. The image becomes larger
and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B).
The vehicle will transition to your
peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 212).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or
glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or
ammonia-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to
your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets
you move the mirror head up or down
and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the
front and back of the mirror. Mirror
performance may be affected. A rear
center passenger or raised rear center
head restraint may also block light
from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to
reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It
will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse
gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra shade.
90
Windows and Mirrors
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E138667
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Do not try to manually move the
sun shade.
The power rear sun shade covers the
rear window of the vehicle.
E145986
The control is located in the overhead
console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up
and down feature. Press and release
the control to move the sun shade. To
stop motion, press the control a
second time.
The sun shade will automatically
retract when the transmission is
shifted into R.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them
unattended in the vehicle. They may
seriously hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the
proximity of the roof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually
opened or closed when the moonroof
is closed. Pull the shade toward the
front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on
the overhead console and have a
one-touch open and close feature. To
stop it during one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
91
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the
Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It
will stop short of the fully opened
position.
Note: This position helps to reduce
wind noise or rumbling which may
happen with the moonroof fully open.
Touch (A) again to fully open the
moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
and reverse some distance if an
obstacle is detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close it.
Retractable Panoramic Roof (If
Equipped)
The moonroof controls on the
overhead console operate the same
except the moonroof will open fully
when the open control is touched.
Automatic Glass Movement
When the retractable panoramic roof
is open, it will automatically move to
a position less than full open under
certain vehicle conditions. This helps
to reduce wind noise. If the glass is
between this position and full open
and your vehicle reaches a high speed,
the glass will automatically move to
the defined position.
You can override automatic
movement by touching the moonroof
open or close control. The feature will
remain overridden until the ignition is
switched off then back on.
Power Sunscreen
The sunscreen controls are located
on the overhead console.
E145985
CloseA
OpenB
Touch the associated control to
operate the sunscreen.
92
Windows and Mirrors
The sunscreen must be open before
opening the moonroof. If the
sunscreen is closed and the moonroof
open control is touched, the
sunscreen will open first followed by
the moonroof. If both the sunscreen
and moonroof are open and the
moonroof close control is touched,
the sunscreen will close first followed
by the moonroof.
93
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E152749
TachometerA
Information displayB
SpeedometerC
Fuel gaugeD
Engine coolant temperature gaugeE
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the
information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle
has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 100).
94
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Settings and
Personalization
See General Information (page 100).
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much
fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may
vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon
and arrow indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the
level indicator will be in the normal
range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine
and let the engine cool.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious.
Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear
in the information display and function
the same as a warning lamp but do not
display when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If
Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color
to indicate what mode the
system is in: See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 196).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is
turned on. Turns off when the speed
control system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates
when the adaptive cruise control
system is engaged. Turns off when
the speed control system is
disengaged.
95
Instrument Cluster
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will
continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving,
it indicates a malfunction.
Switch off all unnecessary
electrical equipment and have the
system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you
switch this feature off or in
conjunction with a message.
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 212).
See Information Messages (page
105).
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake
with the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving,
check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not
engaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system malfunction.
Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized
dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the
warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take
you longer to stop your vehicle. Have
your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking
brake engaged can cause brake failure
and the risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you
switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or
right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on.
If the indicators stay on or flash faster,
check for a burned out bulb. See
Changing a Bulb (page 282).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is
on and any door is not
completely closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash
when the electric parking
brake has a malfunction. See
Electric Parking Brake (page 178).
96
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let
cool. See Engine Coolant Check
(page 268).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the
engine running or when you
are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so and switch
the engine off. Check the engine oil
level. See Engine Oil Check (page
267).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being
correct. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime
will sound to remind you to
fasten your safety belt. See
Safety Belt Minder (page 38).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when
you start your vehicle,
continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have
the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you
switch the front fog lamps
on.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield
in certain instances when
using adaptive cruise control and/or
the collision warning system. It will
also illuminate momentarily when you
start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you
switch the high beam
headlamps on. It will flash
when you use the headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is
on and the hood is not
completely closed.
Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
E144813
Illuminates when the lane
keeping system is activated.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the
fuel level is low or the fuel
tank is nearly empty. Refuel
as soon as possible.
97
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your
tire pressure is low. If the
lamp remains on with the
engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily
when you switch the ignition on to
confirm the lamp is functional. If it
does not illuminate when you switch
the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by
your authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is
low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you
switch the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a
powertrain or an AWD fault
has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays
illuminated after the engine
is started, it indicates that the On
Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel
and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 161).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a
moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Note: Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned on prior to engine start to
check the bulb and to indicate
whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light
will stay on until the engine is cranked,
then turn itself off if no malfunctions
are present. However, if after 15
seconds the service engine soon light
blinks eight times, it means that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System
(page 161).
98
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system
is active. If it remains
illuminated or does not
illuminate when you switch the
ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the
system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately. See Using
Stability Control (page 183).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you
switch the system off. It will
go out when you switch the
system back on or when you switch
the ignition off. See Using Stability
Control (page 183).
Trunk Ajar
E159323
Displays when the ignition is
on and the trunk is not
completely closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's
door and you have left the key in the
ignition with it in the off or accessory
position.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Chirps the horn twice when you exit
the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is
in RUN, indicating the vehicle is still
on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key
from the ignition and open the driver's
door and you have left the headlamps
or parking lamps on.
Parking Brake On Warning
Chime
Sounds when you have left the
parking brake on and drive your
vehicle. If the warning chime remains
on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
99
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take their focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that
you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can
be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls
E152750
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit
a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow
button at any time to return to the
main menu display (escape
button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left
side of the information display, you
can choose from the following
categories:
E138660
Trip 1 & 2
E144640
Fuel Economy
E144639
Driver Assist
E100023
Settings
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category.
Press the left arrow key as needed to
exit back to the main menu.
100
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
E138660
Choose between the
standard or enhanced trip
display.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip odometer
Elapsed trip time
Average fuel economy
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip odometer — shows the accumulated trip distance.
• Trip Timer— timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when
the vehicle is restarted.
• Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
E144640
Use the left/right arrow
buttons to choose the
desired fuel economy
display.
Fuel Economy
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
Driver Assist
E144639
Use the up/down arrow
buttons to choose between
the following display options.
101
Information Displays
Driver Assist
—On / OffTraction Control
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Blindspot
High / Normal / LowSensitivityCollision Warn
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Cross Traffic
—Adaptive / NormalCruise Control
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Driver Alert
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Driver Alert Display
Alert / Aid / Alert +
Aid
ModeLane keeping Sys
High / Normal / LowIntensity
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Front Park Aid
—On (default on key cycle) /
Off
Rear Park Aid
Settings
E100023
In this mode, you can
configure different driver
setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and
may not appear.
102
Information Displays
Settings
Comfort /
Normal / Sport
Handling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal / SportHandling in S /
Performance in S
—On / OffEasy Entry / Exit
—On (default on key
cycle) / Off
Auto Engine Off
On / OffAdaptive Head LampsLighting
On / OffAuto Highbeam
Select time
interval
Autolamp Delay
Settings (cont’d)
On / OffAutolockLocksVehicle
(cont’d)
On / OffAutounlock
On / OffMislock
All doors / Driver
door
Remote Unlocking
Hold Ok to InitializeNeutral Tow
Set to XXX %Oil Life Reset
On / OffPower Deck Lid
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
103
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
AutoClimate ControlRemote StartVehicle
(cont’d)
Last Settings
AutoSeats and
Steering Wheel
Off
5 / 10 / 15 minutesDuration
On / OffSystem
On / OffRemote OpenWindows
On / OffRemote Close
On / OffCourtesy WipeWipers
On / OffRain Sensing
—Hold OK to
Create MyKey
Create MyKeyMyKey
—Always On / User
Selectable
911 Assist
—Always On / User
Selectable
Traction Control
—Choose desired
speed or off
Max Speed
—Choose desired
speed or off
Speed Minder
—On / OffVolume Limiter
—On / OffDo Not Disturb
—Hold OK to Clear
All MyKeys
Clear MyKeys
—Choose your
applicable setting
LanguageDisplay
104
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
—On / OffSpeedometer
km/h/MPH
—Choose your
applicable setting
Distance
—Choose your
applicable setting
Temperature
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle
options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be
available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending
upon which cluster type you have.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge
and remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages
will be removed automatically after
a short time.
Certain messages need to be
confirmed before you can access the
menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system needs service. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Active Park Fault
105
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the
ACC from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 196).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive
cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 196).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water
in front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor
to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
196).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been
disabled.
Cruise Control Auto-
matic Braking Turned
Off
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the
ACC from engaging.
Front Sensor Not
Aligned
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated
controls to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise -
Driver Resume
Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate
the adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise
Speed Too Low to
Activate
Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically
adjusting the gap distance and the driver needs to shift
the transmission into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
106
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac®
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due
to a blocked sensor.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displayed when the traction control has been disabled
or enabled by the driver.
AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due
to a blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near
Passenger Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to
unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 73).
Vehicle Alarm to Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in
XX Seconds
Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase
fuel economy.
Engine Shut Off for
Fuel Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.
You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in
XX Seconds Press Ok
to Override
107
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily
disabled to protect itself from overheating.
AWD Temporarily
Disabled
Displayed when the AWD system has been automatic-
ally disabled to protect itself. This is caused by oper-
ating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed
or if the system is overheating.
AWD Off
The AWD system will resume normal function and clear
this message after driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system is allowed to
cool.
AWD Restored
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/
Transmission/AWD light when the AWD system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
AWD Malfunction
Service Required
108
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing.
If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging
System
Displayed when the battery management system
detects an extended low-voltage condition. Various
vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the
battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon
as possible to improve system voltage. If the system
voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned
Off
Displayed when the battery management system
determines that the battery is at a low state of charge.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the
battery. This message will clear once the vehicle has
been started and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to
Save Battery
109
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System
Fault
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
See Blind Spot Monitor (page 212).
Blindspot Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See
Blind Spot Monitor (page 212).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
Displayed when the blind spot information system and
cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See
Blind Spot Monitor (page 212).
Cross Traffic Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the
collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
Displayed when the collision warning system radar is
blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad
weather or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver
can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the
collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
110
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely
closed and the vehicle is moving.
X Door Ajar
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely
closed.
Displays when the luggage compartment is not
completely closed.
Trunk Ajar
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has
been reset. See Keyless Entry (page 68).
Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning
Rest Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning
Rest Suggested
Engine
ActionMessage
Engine service is required. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Engine Fault Service
Now
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place and allow to engine to cool.
If the problem persists, contact your authorized dealer.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 268).
High Engine Temper-
ature Stop Safely
111
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly
closed.
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact
your authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page
170).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while
starting the vehicle.
Press Brake to START
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See
Keyless Starting (page 150).
No Key Detected
Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to
shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access Key is not
detected inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
This message is displayed when there is a problem
with your vehicle’ s starting system. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch
while starting the vehicle.
Press Brake and
Clutch to Start
Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while
starting the vehicle.
Press Clutch to Start
112
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed during spare key programming, when an
intelligent access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program
Successful
Displayed during spare key programming, when an
intelligent access key has failed to be programmed.
Key Program Failure
Displayed during spare key programming when the
maximum number of keys have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Displayed during spare key programming when not
enough keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the
battery as soon as possible.
Key Battery Low
Replace Soon
Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare
key using two existing MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the
vehicle and the engine is on.
Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your author-
ized dealer as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused
the system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera
Temporarily Not
Available
The system has detected a condition the requires the
windshield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Low
Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your author-
ized dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera
Malfunction Service
Required
Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep
their hands on the steering wheel.
Keep Hands on
Steering Wheel
113
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on with your engine running, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pres-
sure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or
less. See Engine Oil Check (page 267).
Change Engine Oil
Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine
Oil Check (page 267).
Oil Change Required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake
system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 276).
Brake Fluid Level
LOW
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Check Brake System
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is
excessively high.
Engine Coolant Over-
temperature
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be
refilled.
Washer Fluid Level
Low
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order
to help reduce high coolant temperatures.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport
or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to
operate properly. See your authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service
due to a powertrain malfunction.
See Manual
114
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot
be programmed.
MyKey Not Created
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed
limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top
Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed
limit is reached.
Vehicle at Top Speed
of MyKey Setting
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is
activated.
Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is
activated.
AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control
is activated.
Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activ-
ated.
MyKey Park Aid
Cannot be Deactiv-
ated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey
settings.
Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
115
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition
that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
See Parking Aid (page 184).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays when the system has detected a condition
that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
See Parking Aid (page 184).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is
running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5
km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake
is released, contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Malfunc-
tion Service Now
Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not
Applied Apply Park
Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake did not set.Park Brake Not
Applied Re-Apply
Displays when the electric parking brake is running a
diagnostic check.
Park Brake Mainten-
ance Mode
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has
not be released.
Park Brake Use
Switch to Release
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has
not be released and the vehicle is moving.
Press Brake to
Release Park Brake
116
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condi-
tion that requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
Displays when the electric parking brake was not
released causing it to overheat.
Park Brake System
Overheated
Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the
vehicle is started.
Release Park Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is released.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition
that requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop the
vehicle a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition
within the power steering system or passive entry or
passive start system requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the
vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Turn Key to
On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start
button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Start Button
117
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to
apply the brake.
Press brake + Start
Button
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking
time in attempting to start the vehicle.
Cranking Time
Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the
vehicle.
Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start
Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have
low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 298).
LOW Tire Pressure
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (page 298).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunc-
tioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more information
on how the system operates under these conditions,
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 298). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
118
Information Displays
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays when the traction control system has been
switched off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
181).
Traction Control Off /
Traction Control On
Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard
are activated.
Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated
Transmission
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.Transmission
Malfunction Service
Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool.
Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over-
heating Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool.
Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over-
temperature Stop
Safely
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
Displays when the transmission has overheated and
has limited functionality. See Automatic Transmis-
sion (page 165).
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before
you drive.
Transmission
Warming Up Please
Wait
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in
Park
Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift
strategy.
Transmission
Adjusted
119
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift
strategy.
Transmission Adapt
Mode
Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked
and unable to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup On
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked
and free to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup Off
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed
to enable the transmission to shift from park.
Depress Brake to Shift
from Park
Displays when the neutral button N needs to be
pressed again to enter neutral hold. See Automatic
Transmission (page 165).
Press N again to Enter
Stay in Neutral Mode
Displays when neutral hold is active. See Automatic
Transmission (page 165).
Stay in Neutral Mode
Engaged
Displays when neutral hold is active. See General
Information (page 100).
Stay in Neutral Mode
Engaged See Manual
to Disable
Displays when there is a system fault and the park
brake needs to be depressed before exiting the vehicle.
See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting
the Vehicle
Displays when there is a system fault and the park
brake needs to be depressed before exiting the vehicle.
See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Cannot Shift Trans
Use Park Brake to
Secure Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle
is shifting to park. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
120
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle
is shifting to reverse. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Drive Unavailable
Select S for Drive
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Drive Unavailable
Select L for Drive
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Sport Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Low Unavailable
Service Required
Displays when neutral tow is active and the ignition
needs to be turned off. See Towing the Vehicle on
Four Wheels (page 232).
Neutral Tow Engaged
Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
Displays while attempting to exit neutral tow. The brake
pedal needs to be depressed and park button selected
to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 232).
Neutral Tow Engaged
Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit
Neutral Tow
Displays when neutral tow is active and the park brake
needs to be released. See Towing the Vehicle on
Four Wheels (page 232).
Neutral Tow Remove
Park Brake for Towing
Displays when neutral tow has been deactivated.Neutral Tow Disen-
gaged
121
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and
Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are
established by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC). Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance/Strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels,
freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one
and result in the audio system muting.
Station Overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially
pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to
technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when
used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with
homemade paper (adhesive) labels
into the CD player as the label may
peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs.
Please contact your authorized dealer
for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly
shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges
only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the
center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
122
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight
or heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing
and playing MP3 individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for
MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3
folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on
the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may
be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a
folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player
numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension)
and all folders containing MP3
files, from F001 (folder) T001
(track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level
of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs,
it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you
create. While various files may be
present, (files with extensions other
than mp3), only files with the .mp3
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a
variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays
and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files
play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system
only plays the .mp3 files in the current
folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES
WITH: PREMIUM
AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that you use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of
electronic devices while driving.
123
Audio System
Note: The MyLincoln Touch™ system
controls most of the audio features.
See Entertainment (page 361).
E146318
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Eject a CD.B
TUNE +/-: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of
the TUNE buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use the TUNE
buttons find to the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Volume: Swipe your finger across bar to adjust the volume level on
your system.
D
Power: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.E
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next
track or available radio station. Press and hold to either reverse or fast
forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance
through the radio band in individual increments.
F
124
Audio System
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature
units between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
See Settings (page 351).
E146320
Driver temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease
the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also
adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is
disengaged.
A
Fan speed control: Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or
decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.
B
Passenger temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease
the air temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
C
Power: Press to turn the system on and off. When the system is off,
outside air cannot enter the vehicle.
D
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates
and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This
may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C)
and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except
MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
E
126
Climate Control
A/C: Press the button to turn on or turn off the air conditioning system.
To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the
windows slightly open for two to three minutes. Use A/C with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
F
MAX A/C: Press the button to switch on. Recirculated air is distributed
through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning is automatically
adjusted to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the
full cool position. This re-cooling of the interior is more economical
and efficient.
G
AUTO: Press the button to switch on. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning automatically adjusts
to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior is more economical and efficient.
H
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 128).
I
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
de-mister vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING
THE INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated
air may cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of
air from the footwell air vents
regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up
inside your vehicle, do not drive with
the system switched off or with
recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the
front seats as this may interfere with
the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves
from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Do not adjust the settings when
your vehicle interior is extremely hot or
cold. The system automatically adjusts
to the previously stored settings. For
the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: At low ambient temperatures
with AUTO selected, the system directs
air toward the windshield and side
windows for as long as the engine
remains cold.
Note: When you switch the system off,
outside air cannot enter your vehicle.
127
Climate Control
Note: When the system is in AUTO
mode, and the interior and exterior
temperatures are high, the system
automatically selects recirculated air
to maximize cooling of the interior.
When the system reaches the selected
air temperature, it automatically
switches to outside air.
Note: When you select windshield
defrosting and defogging, the
instrument panel and footwell level
functions automatically switch off and
air conditioning switches on. Outside
air flows into your vehicle.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to
the desired setting.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to
a comfortable setting.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to
the desired setting.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a
comfortable setting.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to
the desired setting.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: You must switch the ignition on
to use this feature.
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. Press the
button again within 10 minutes to
switch it off. It switches off
automatically after 10 minutes, or
when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove
decals from the inside of the rear
window. This may cause damage
to the heated grid lines, which your
warranty does not cover.
Heated Exterior Mirror
Note: Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it has frozen
in place. These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or
glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
128
Climate Control
Both heated mirrors remove ice, mist
and fog when you switch on the
heated rear window.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin
air filter. It is located behind the glove
box.
The particulate filtration system
reduces the concentration of airborne
particles such as dust, spores and
pollen in the air supplied to the interior
of your vehicle.
Note: To prevent foreign objects from
entering the system, make sure the
cabin air is in place at all times.
Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or
damage to the system.
The particulate filtration system gives
you and your passengers the following
benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior
compartment cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle
deposits.
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page
440).
For additional cabin air filter
information, or to replace the filter,
see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The climate control system adjusts
the cabin temperature during remote
start.
You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. Turn the
ignition on to return the system to its
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments. You need to turn certain
vehicle-dependent features back on,
such as:
• heated seats
• cooled seats
• heated steering wheel
• heated mirrors
• heated rear window.
You can adjust the settings using the
information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 100).
Automatic Settings
You can set the climate control to
operate in AUTO mode through the
information display setting: Remote
Start > Climate Control > Heater-A/C
> Auto. The climate control system
automatically sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to
72°F (22°C). Cooled seats are set to
high (if available, and selected to
AUTO in the information display).
In moderate weather, the system
either heats or cools (based on
previous settings). The rear defroster,
heated mirrors and heated/cooled
seats do not automatically turn on.
129
Climate Control
In cold weather, the system is set to
72°F (22°C). The heated seats and
heated steering wheel are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in
the information display). The rear
defroster and heated mirrors
automatically turn on.
Last Settings
You can set the climate control to
operate using the last climate control
settings through the information
display setting: Remote Start >
Climate Control > Heater–A/C > Last
Settings. The climate control system
automatically uses the settings last
selected before turning off the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls
other heated and cooled devices
inside the vehicle. These devices (if
available and selected to AUTO in the
information displays) may switch on
during remote start. Heated devices
typically switch on during cold
weather, and cooled devices during
hot weather.
130
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seat back
reclined too far can take weight off
the seat cushion and affect the
decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Always sit upright against your seat
back, with your feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seat back as
this can cause the occupant to
slide under the safety belt, resulting
in serious injury in the event of a
collision.
Do not place objects higher than
the seat back to reduce the risk
of serious injury in the event of a
collision or during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and air bags
will provide optimum protection in the
event of a collision.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Do not recline the seat back more
than 30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as
possible. Make sure that you
remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel.
We recommend a minimum of 10
inches (25 centimeters) between
your breastbone and the air bag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you
can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint
before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a
collision. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
131
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety
device. Whenever possible it
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied.
Install the head restraint properly
to help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a collision.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an
upright driving position before adjusting
the head restraint. Adjust the head
restraint so that the top of it is level
with the top of your head and as far
forward as possible. Make sure that you
remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint
to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E153105
Rear center head restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint
A
Two steel stemsB
Guide sleeve adjust and
unlock button
C
Guide sleeve unlock and
remove button
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
132
Seats
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves and push the head restraint
down until it locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (If
Equipped)
The front head restraints may have a
tilting feature for extra comfort. To tilt
the head restraint, do the following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward
toward your head to the desired
position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to
the rearward, untilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or
seat back when your vehicle is
moving.
Do not place cargo or any
objects behind the seat back
before returning it to the original
position.
133
Seats
E144632
Power Lumbar
E144633
Multi-Contour Front Seats with
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn
off after 20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or
the vehicle must be in accessory mode
to activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any
selection to activate. The seat back
and cushion massage cannot function
at the same time.
E156301
134
Seats
Lumbar and Bolster modeMassage mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity
decrease and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage
intensity adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity
increase
D
-On and offE
*
The massage feature will default to
an alternating massage mode with
back massage intensity adjustment.
The lumbar and bolster feature will
default to the middle lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the
back bolster. Press C a third time to
adjust the cushion bolster.
This feature can also be adjusted
through the touch screen. When
switched on, the system displays
directions for you to adjust the lumbar
settings in your seat or to set the
massage function. To access and
make adjustments to the lumbar
setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon >
Vehicle > Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the
lumbar intensity.
To access and make adjustments to
the massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon >
Vehicle >Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat
memory, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is
clear of obstructions and that all
occupants are clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall
the position of the driver's seat and
power mirrors. The memory control is
located on the driver’s door.
135
Seats
E142554
Saving a Pre-Set Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors
to your desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button until you hear a single
chime.
Up to three pre-set memory positions
may be saved. A memory pre-set may
be saved at any time.
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
Press and release the pre-set button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat and mirrors will
move to the position stored for that
pre-set.
Note: A pre-set memory position can
only be recalled when the ignition is off,
or when the transmission selector lever
is in position P or N (and your vehicle
is not moving) if the ignition is on.
A pre-set memory position can also
be recalled by pressing the unlock
button on your remote control or
intelligent access key if it is linked to
a pre-set position, or by a driver door
handle unlock with an intelligent
access key present.
Linking a Pre-Set Position to
your Remote Control or
Intelligent Access Key
Your vehicle can save the pre-set
memory positions for up to three
remote controls or intelligent access
(IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the
memory positions to the desired
positions.
2. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button for about five seconds. A
chime will sound after about two
seconds. Continue holding until a
second chime is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the
lock button on the remote control
you are linking. A single chime will
sound.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3,
press the unlock button on the remote
control.
Note: To stop seat movement during
a recall, press any driver seat
adjustment control, any of the memory
buttons, or any mirror control switch.
Seat movement will also stop if you
move your vehicle.
136
Seats
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or IA key is in range, the memory
function will move to the settings of
the first key stored.
Easy Entry and Exit Function
If the easy entry and exit feature is
enabled, this feature automatically
moves the driver seat position
rearward up to five centimeters when
the transmission selector lever is in
position P and the key is removed or
the keyless start ignition is turned off.
The driver seat will return to the
previous position when the key is put
in the ignition or the keyless start
ignition is activated.
The easy entry and exit feature can
be turned on or off using the driver
information display.
REAR SEATS
To lower the seat back(s) from inside
the vehicle, do the following:
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the seat
back.
2. Push the seat back forward.
Note: Your vehicle may have split seat
backs that must be folded individually.
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
137
Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel
pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause
burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do
not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This
may damage the heating element
which may cause the heated seat to
overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water
or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry
thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless
the engine is running. Doing so can
cause the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and
off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel
pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. The seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this
may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the
seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or
any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry
thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are
located on the rear of the center
console.
138
Seats
The heated seats only operate when
the ignition is on.
E146322
• Press the heated seat
symbol/button to cycle through
the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
• Press again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at
every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is on, activating the high or low
heated seat switch enables heating
mode. When activated, they will turn
off automatically when the engine is
turned off.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
The cooled seats will only function
when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings
and off. Cooler settings are indicated
by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 rpms
while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need
to be reactivated.
Heated and cooled seat air
filter replacement (if
equipped)
The climate controlled seat system
includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically.
The filters are located under each
front seat and can be accessed from
the second row foot-well area. Move
the front seats all the way forward
and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
139
Seats
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate
counterclockwise once the tabs
are released, then remove the
filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and
rotate clockwise into the housing
until it clips into position.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the
armrest and cupholder. To open the
storage lid, pull up on the latch
located between the cupholders.
Armrest pass-through
Note: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36
kilograms) of weight on the
pass-through door.
140
Seats
E152622
Release the latch, then pull down on
the door located in the back of the
armrest. You can store cargo of a
longer length such as skis or lumber.
141
Seats
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door
and security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the
system with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future
system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the
sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed
function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes
later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum
of three devices. To change or replace
any of the three devices after it has
been initially programmed, you must
first erase the current settings. See
Erasing the function button codes later
in this section.
E142657
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of
devices within the home. As well as
being programmed for garage doors,
the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry
door locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the
hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
142
Universal Garage Door Opener
Note: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may stop
transmitting. If this occurs press and
hold the function button on the visor
while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter every two
seconds. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly once the radio
frequency signal is accepted.
E142658
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Hold the garage door hand-held
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the
button you want to program.
3. Press and hold both the button on
the visor you want to program and
the hand-held transmitter button
until the indicator light on the visor
changes from flashing slowly to
rapidly, then release.
4. Press and hold the function button
you programmed for 5 seconds,
then release. You may need to do
this twice to activate the door. If
your garage door does not operate,
observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on,
programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed button to
activate the door.
If the indicator light on the visor
flashes rapidly for two seconds then
turns to a constant light, follow the
steps below.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach
the unit and you may need to remove
the cover or lamp lens.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 30 seconds to
complete the next step.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button
you want to program on the visor
for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat
this step. Depending on the brand
of garage door opener you may
need to repeat this sequence a
third time.
To program additional buttons repeat
steps one through four.
143
Universal Garage Door Opener
For questions or comments, please
contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until
the indicator lights above the
buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash,
release the buttons. The codes for
all buttons are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously
trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button.
Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step
1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie
Intellicode® 2 Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2
transmitter must already be
programmed to operate with the
garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons
on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The indicator light will
change from green to red and
green.
2. Press the same button twice to
confirm the change to
programming mode. If done
properly the indicator light will
appear red.
144
Universal Garage Door Opener
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3
inches (2–8 centimeter) of the
button on the visor you want to
program.
4. Press and hold both the
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter and the
button you want to program. The
indicator light on the visor will flash
rapidly when the programming is
successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will
transmit for up to 30 seconds. If
HomeLink does not program within 30
seconds the Genie transmitter will need
to be pressed again. If the Genie
transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until
the indicator light turns off before
pressing the button again.
Once HomeLink has been
programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of
program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will
change from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to
confirm the change. If done
correctly the indicator light will
turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the
Genie Intellicode Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to
access the garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button
on the garage door opener motor
until both blue indicator lights turn
on.
2. Release the program button. Only
the smaller round indicator light
should be on.
3. Press and release the program
button. The larger purple indicator
light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie
Intellicode 2 hand-held
transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both
indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now
flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor
for 2 seconds. Repeat this step up
to 3 times until the garage door
moves.
Programming is now complete.
145
Universal Garage Door Opener
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the
two outer HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash. The
indicator light will begin flashing in 10
to 20 seconds, at which time both
buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased,
and the indicator light should blink
slowly to indicate the device is in train
mode when any of the three
HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
146
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use of
the lighter can cause damage not
covered by your warranty, and can
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to
restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
This will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over
the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180
watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point
can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point
caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of
the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• in the front of the center console
• inside the center console storage
bin
• on the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do
not use any extension cord with the
110 volt AC power point, since it will
defeat the safety protection design.
Doing so my cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple
devices that can reach beyond the 150
watt load limit and could result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: Keep the engine running to use
the power point.
147
Auxiliary Power Points
E143941
The power point is used for powering
electrical devices that require up to
150 watts. It is located on the rear of
the center console.
When the indicator light, located on
the power point, is:
• on — power point is ready to
supply power.
• off — power point power supply is
off; ignition is not on.
• flashing — power point is in fault
mode.
The power point temporarily turns off
power if the 150 watt limit is
exceeded. It can also switch to a fault
mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting
conditions. Let the system cool off,
then turn the ignition off then on for
an overheating condition.
The power point is not designed for
electric devices such as:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators
• Measuring devices which process
precise data, for example medical
equipment or measuring
equipment
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply, for
example
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch sensor lamps
148
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of features.
E146582
Front storage bin with
auxiliary power point
A
CupholdersB
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and
media hub
C
Auxiliary power point, 110 volt
AC power point
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.
149
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
If you disconnect the battery, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for
approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers)
after you reconnect it. This is because
the engine management system must
realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of
fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your
vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, creating the risk of
fire.
Do not start the engine in a
closed garage or in other
enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can
be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle
if you smell exhaust fumes.
The powertrain control system meets
all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements
regulating the impulse electrical field
or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid
pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the
accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNING
The keyless starting system may
not function if the key is close to
metal objects or electronic devices
such as mobile phones.
Note: A valid key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition
on and start the engine.
Switching the Ignition On
(Accessory Mode)
E146431
Press the START button once. It is
located on the instrument panel near
the steering wheel. All electrical
circuits and accessories are
operational and the warning lamps
and indicators illuminate.
Starting Your Vehicle
Carry out the following steps to start
your vehicle:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
150
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Put the transmission in position P.
3. Press the START button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle,
do the following:
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in
the cupholder. Place the remote in
the backup slot (B) at the bottom
of the cupholder.
2. With the key in this position, press
the brake pedal, then the START
button to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Stopping the Engine When
Your Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the START button once.
Note: This switches off all electrical
circuits warning lamps and indicators.
Note: If the engine is left running
unattended for 30 minutes, the ignition
and engine automatically shut down.
Stopping the Engine When
Your Vehicle is Moving
1. Press and hold the START button
for one second, or press it three
times within two seconds.
2. Move the transmission selector
lever to position N and use the
brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped,
put the transmission in position P
and switch the ignition off.
WARNING
Switching off the engine when
the vehicle is still moving will
result in a loss of brake and steering
assistance. The steering will not lock,
but higher effort will be required.
When you switch the ignition off,
some electrical circuits, warning
lamps and indicators may also be off.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds
of switching it off, even if a valid key
is not present.
Within 20 seconds of switching your
vehicle off, press the brake pedal and
press the start button. After 20
seconds have expired, you can no
longer start your vehicle without the
key present inside the vehicle.
151
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Once your vehicle has started, it
remains running until you press the
start button, even if it does not detect
a valid key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid key. You
cannot start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid key within 20 seconds.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Your vehicle is equipped with a
feature that automatically shuts down
the engine if it has been idling for an
extended period of time. The ignition
also turns off in order to save battery
power. Before the engine shuts down,
a message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting
down from 30 seconds. If you do not
intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut
down in order to save fuel. Start your
vehicle as you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch
off the automatic engine shutdown
feature. When it is temporarily
switched off, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
The engine shutdown can be stopped,
or the timer reset, at any point before
the 30 second countdown has expired
by doing any of the following:
• • You can reset the timer by
interacting with your vehicle (such
as pressing the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal).
• • You can temporarily switch off
the shutdown feature any time the
ignition is on (for the current
ignition cycle only). Use the
information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 100).
• • During the countdown before
engine shutdown, you are
prompted to press OK or RESET
(depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the
current ignition cycle only).
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
After you start the engine, the idle
speed increases to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does
not slow down automatically, have
your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have
fastened their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in position P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator
pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
152
Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Put the transmission in position P
or N.
3. Press the START button. The
engine may continue cranking for
up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on
the first try, wait for a short period and
try again.
If you have difficulty starting the
engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator
pedal slightly and try again.
If you cannot start the engine after
three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
and hold it there.
3. Put the transmission in position P.
4. Press the START button.
Guarding Against Exhaust
Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle
if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating
Information
If you stop your vehicle and the leave
the engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters)
• Set your climate control to outside
air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block
heater instructions could result
in property damage or serious
personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems
or two-pronged adapters. There is a
risk of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective
when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to
respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed
in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system
to a grounded 120 volt AC electrical
source.
153
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the
following for a safe and correct
operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension
cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must
be suitable for use outdoors, in
cold temperatures, and be clearly
marked Suitable for Use with
Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an
indoor extension cord outdoors.
This could result in an electric
shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension
cords.
• Make sure that when in operation,
the extension cord plug and heater
cord plug connections are free and
clear of water. This could cause an
electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in
a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord
and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for
approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged
and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs
of the block heater cord plug when
not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation
before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals
are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0
kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of
use. The system does not have a
thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately
three hours of operation. Using the
heater longer than three hours does
not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
154
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel
spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler door (Easy
Fuel capless fuel system), do not
refuel until the sound stops.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause
serious injury or death if misused
or mishandled.
The flow of fuel through a fuel
pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if
fuel is pumped into an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler
neck. Never smoke while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous
under certain conditions. Care should
be taken to avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines
when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician
immediately, even if no symptoms
are immediately apparent. The
toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling
too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing
of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your
eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn),
flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to
seek proper medical attention
could lead to permanent injury.
155
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if
absorbed through the skin. If fuel
is splashed on the skin, clothing or
both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor
causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are
taking “Antabuse” or other forms
of disulfiram for the treatment of
alcoholism. Breathing gasoline
vapors, or skin contact could cause
an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury
or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: We recommend that you use
only high quality fuel without additives
or other engine treatments.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline
with additives containing other
metallic compounds (e.g.
manganese-based). They could
damage the emission system.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance
and repairs may not be covered under
warranty.
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel
vehicle, then only use unleaded fuel
or unleaded fuel blended with a
maximum of 15% ethanol. Do not use
fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel
methanol, leaded fuel or any other
fuel because it could damage or
impair the emission control system.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by
law.
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including
manganese-based additives.
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some fuel stations
offer fuels posted as regular with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in
high altitude areas. Do not use fuels
that have a posted rating below 87
octane. Premium fuel will provide
improved performance and is
recommended for severe duty usage
such as trailer tow.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily while you are using
fuel with the recommended octane
rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect
on vehicle components.
156
Fuel and Refueling
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system
to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking
time will take a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition,
just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8
liters) of fuel is enough to restart
the engine. If the vehicle is out of
fuel and on a steep grade, more
than 1 gallon (3.8 liters) may be
required.
• The service engine soon indicator
may come on.
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of
portable fuel containers or
aftermarket funnels into the capless
fuel system. This could damage the
fuel system and its seal, and may
cause fuel to run onto the ground
instead of filling the tank, which could
result in serious personal injury.
Do not try to pry open or push
open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal
and cause injury to you or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels;
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it. The
included funnel has been specially
designed to work safely with your
vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank
from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
E148854
• In vehicles equipped with a spare
tire, the funnel is located between
the rear seats and the spare tire
well. Fold down the rear seats and
lift the carpeted panel to access
the funnel.
E148856
157
Fuel and Refueling
• In vehicles equipped with a tire
mobility kit the funnel is located in
the rear of the vehicle, inside the
load compartment, underneath
the carpeted floor panel and is
accessible from the trunk.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank
from a portable fuel container:
1. Locate the white plastic funnel
that comes with your vehicle.
E142668
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
capless fuel system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the
portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or
properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your
authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
WARNINGS
Turn off your engine when you
are refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel
or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and
smoking materials away from
fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do
not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on
the ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it
is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in
contact with the fuel container
while filling.
• Do not use a device that would
hold the fuel pump handle in the
fill position.
158
Fuel and Refueling
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel
System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler door, do not
refuel until the sound stops.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn
the ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
E156032
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle
fully into the fuel system, and
leave the nozzle fully inserted to
open both doors until you are done
pumping. Hold handle higher
during insertion for easier access.
E154765
4. After you are done pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about five to ten
seconds after pumping fuel before
removing the fuel filler nozzle. This
allows residual fuel to drain back
into the fuel tank and not spill onto
the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may
occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
overfill the tank to the point that the
fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler
nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run
down the drain located below and in
front of the fuel filler door.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly
closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the
instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the
following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and
remove any visible debris from the
fuel fill opening.
159
Fuel and Refueling
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or
the fuel fill funnel provided with
the vehicle several times to allow
the inlet to close properly. This will
dislodge any debris preventing the
inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately.
It may take several driving cycles for
the message to turn off. A driving
cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the
engine off) followed by city or
highway driving. Continuing to drive
with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on
as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
empty reserve varies and should not be
relied upon to increase driving range.
When refueling your vehicle after the
fuel gauge indicates empty, you might
not be able to refuel the full amount of
the advertised capacity of the fuel tank
due to the empty reserve still present
in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel
gauge indicates empty. Do not rely on
this fuel for driving. The usable
capacity of the fuel tank is the amount
of fuel that can be put into the tank
after the gauge indicates empty. The
advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size – it is the combined usable
capacity plus the empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the
fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling;
an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the
tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the
filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during
the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers)
of driving (this is your engine’s
break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2000
miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers
- 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel
expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways
to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and
record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill
ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer
reading from the current odometer
reading.
160
Fuel and Refueling
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100,
then divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month
and record the type of driving (city or
highway). This provides an accurate
estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions.
Additionally, keeping records during
summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean
lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your
vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system
heats up the engine compartment and
exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry
of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable
your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make
sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components
continue to work properly:
To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while
your vehicle is moving, especially
at high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information
performed according to the
specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items
listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life
and performance of your vehicle and
to its emissions system
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for
service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts
should be equivalent to genuine Ford
Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
161
Fuel and Refueling
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light,
fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or
loss of engine power could indicate
that the emission control system is
not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized
changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who
manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises
a fleet of vehicles are not permitted
to intentionally remove an emission
control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the
Vehicle Emission Control Information
Decal located on or near the engine.
This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty
information for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system
is commonly known as the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II). The
OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II
system also assists your authorized
dealer in properly servicing your
vehicle.
When the service engine
soon indicator illuminates,
the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary
malfunctions may cause the service
engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have
been properly closed. See
Refueling (page 158).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
162
Fuel and Refueling
These temporary malfunctions can
be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing
the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical
system dry out. After three driving
cycles without these or any other
temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should
stay off the next time the engine is
started. A driving cycle consists of a
cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator
remains on, have your vehicle serviced
at the first available opportunity.
Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have
symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service
engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel
economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead
to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb
does not work, the vehicle
may need to be serviced. See
On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
if the service engine soon indicator is
on or not working properly (bulb is
burned out), or if the OBD-II system
has determined that some of the
emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case,
the vehicle is considered not ready for
I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission
has just been serviced, or the battery
has recently run down or been
replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready
for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn
the ignition key to the on position for
15 seconds without cranking the
engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon
indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to
check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete
check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the
following driving cycle consisting of
mixed city and highway driving may
be performed:
163
Fuel and Refueling
15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with
at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and
complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
the above driving cycle will have to be
repeated.
164
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake
fully and make sure the vehicle
is in P (Park). Turn the ignition off
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than three
seconds will limit engine rpm, which
may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to
serious injury.
Push Button Shift
Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic transmission. The shift
buttons are located on the center
stack next the MyLincoln Touch™
system. The gears are selected by
pressing and releasing the PRNDS
buttons. Every time a gear is selected,
the selected button will light up. You
will also see the gear selected appear
in the instrument cluster.
E155989
Understanding the Positions of
your Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out
of P (Park).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on
the center stack of the gear you
want to select.
3. The gear shift button you select
will illuminate and the instrument
cluster will show the selected gear.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the
selected gear.
Note: If the driver attempts to leave
the vehicle while it is in gear, the vehicle
will automatically shift into P (Park).
Seatbelt and door monitors determine
the driver's intent and make the shift
for you. During this time a
Transmission not in Park will appear
in the display screen prompting the
driver to make the shift. To put the
vehicle in gear with the door open
perform steps 1-4. See the Automatic
Return to Park section in this chapter
for more information on this feature.
165
Transmission
E146223
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the front wheels from
turning. Always come to a complete
stop before putting your vehicle into
and out of P (Park). An audible chime
will sound when P (Park) is manually
selected.
The vehicle will automatically shift
into P (Park) when the ignition is
turned off. If the ignition is turned off
while the vehicle is moving, it will first
shift into N (Neutral) until a slow
enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into P (Park)
automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate
when the vehicle is in Stay in Neutral
mode or neutral tow.
The vehicle has a safety feature that
will automatically shift your vehicle
into P (Park) when any of the
following circumstances are met:
• Turn the ignition off.
• Open the driver's door with your
seat belt unlatched.
• Unlatching your seatbelt while the
driver's door is open.
R (Reverse)
With the transmission in R (Reverse),
the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Press the N button to put the vehicle
in N (Neutral). In neutral the vehicle
can be started and is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows the
vehicle to stay in N (Neutral) when
you exit the vehicle.
The vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the N (Neutral) button on
the shifter assembly.
2. The message Press N to enter
Stay in Neutral mode will appear
in the information displays screen.
3. Press the N (Neutral) button again
to enter Stay in Neutral mode.
166
Transmission
The message Stay in Neutral mode
engaged will appear in the
information display screen when the
vehicle has entered Stay in Neutral
mode.
Note: During this mode the N button
will flash continuously and the
instrument cluster will display N as the
selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode put
the vehicle in another gear. See the
Putting the Vehicle in Gear for
instructions on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put the vehicle in Stay
in Neutral mode when entering an
automatic car wash. Failure to do this
could result in vehicle damage that
may not be covered by warranty.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy.
S (Sport)
Putting the vehicle in S (Sport):
• Provides additional engine braking
and extends lower gear operation
to enhance performance for uphill
climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous
areas. This will increase engine
RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly
and at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic®
Transmission
Your SelectShift automatic
transmission gives you the ability to
manually change gears if you'd like.
Paddle Shifters
The paddle shifters allow you to shift
gears quickly, without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
Temporary manual control is provided
when pulling the paddles with the
vehicle in the D (Drive). The system
will determine when temporary
manual control is no longer desired
and reverts back to automatic control.
Extensive manual control can be
achieved by pressing the S (Sport)
button. The system will stay in manual
control until the vehicle is put in
another gear.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to
downshift.
167
Transmission
E144821
Upshift to the recommended shift
speeds according to the following
chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster will display the
selected gear that you are currently
in.
E155990
SelectShift will automatically make
some shifts for you in the event that
your engine speed is running at too
high, or to low an RPM.
Note: Engine damage may occur if
excessive engine revving is held without
shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until
you verify that the brake lamps
are working.
When doing this procedure, you
will be taking the vehicle out of
park which means the vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the
parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if
appropriate.
168
Transmission
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully
released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. See your
authorized dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this procedure is
used.
Note: For some markets this feature
will be disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if
your 12-volt battery has power.
Use the brake-shift interlock override
procedure to put the vehicle in gear in
the event of an electrical malfunction
or if your vehicle has a dead battery.
The brake shift interlock override
button is located inside of the center
console, below the media inputs. You
will need a tool (i.e. a screwdriver or
similar tool) to access the button.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn
the ignition off before performing
this procedure.
E152215
2. Locate the brake shifter interlock
access slot. The slot is located
below the media hub, in the front
of the center console storage bin
and it is not labeled
Note: Make sure that you correctly
identify the access hole as not to
damage the media hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the
brake shift interlock switch. When
the center stack buttons flash, the
vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held,
press the N (Neutral button) to
shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. The vehicle will remain in Stay in
Neutral mode for wrecker towing
purposes or can be shifted to the
desired gear and driven (if the
vehicle can be driven).
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission
Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase
durability and provide consistent shift
feel over the life of the vehicle. A new
vehicle or transmission may have firm
or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect
function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally,
whenever the battery is disconnected
or a new battery installed, the strategy
must be relearned.
169
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In
Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the
engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the
transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or
the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or
snow, it may be rocked out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady
pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
HILL START ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and put the vehicle in P (Park).
You must remain in your vehicle
once you have activated the
system.
During all times, you are
responsible for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved
excessively, or if a malfunction
is detected, the system will be
deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull
away when your vehicle is on a slope
without the need to use the parking
brake.
When the system is active, your
vehicle will remain stationary on the
slope for two to three seconds after
you release the brake pedal. This
allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the
slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, (for example
from a car park ramp, traffic lights or
when reversing uphill into a parking
space).
The system will activate
automatically on any slope which can
result in significant vehicle rollback.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your
vehicle is on a slope, the system
will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from
the brake pedal, your vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling
away for approximately two or
three seconds. This hold time will
automatically be extended if you
are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner.
The brakes will be released
automatically.
170
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels
to power the vehicle. This increases
traction, enabling you to drive over
terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all
the time and requires no input from
the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not
intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited
off-road capabilities in which driving
surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar
to normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage which is not covered
under your warranty.
Note: A warning message will be
displayed in the information display
when an AWD system fault is present
See Information Messages (page 105).
An AWD system fault will cause the
AWD system to default to front-wheel
drive only mode. When this warning
message is displayed, have your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be
displayed in the information display if
the AWD system has overheated See
Information Messages (page 105).
This condition may occur if the vehicle
was operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function
as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in
a safe location and stop the engine for
at least 10 minutes. After the engine
has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the
warning message will turn off and
normal AWD function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different
size other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD
system may disable automatically
and enter front-wheel drive only mode
to protect driveline components. This
condition will be indicated by a
warning in the information display
See Information Messages (page
105). If there is a warning message in
the information display from using the
spare tire, this indicator should turn
off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling
the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired
or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the AWD system.
171
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving In Special Conditions
With All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving
on sand, snow, mud and rough roads
and have operating characteristics
that are somewhat different from
conventional vehicles, both on and off
the highway.
Under severe operating conditions,
the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in
special conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds
which can affect the normal
steering characteristics of your
vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving
on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or
ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of
the Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of
the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application,
ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your
speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning
to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the
apron or shoulder of the road and
slow down gradually before
returning to the pavement. You
may lose control if you do not slow
down or if you turn the steering
wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike
small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to
your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to
slide sideways out of control or
rollover. Remember, your safety
and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake
fully and make sure the gearshift
is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition
to the lock position and remove the
key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully
released, but the brake warning
lamp remains illuminated, the brakes
may not be working properly. See your
authorized dealer.
172
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or
bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the
engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the
transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or
snow it may be rocked out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts, in a steady
pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with
Roll Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency
situation where a sudden sharp
turn must be made, remember to
avoid "over-driving" your vehicle
(i.e., turn the steering wheel only
as rapidly and as far as required to
avoid the emergency). Excessive
steering will result in less vehicle
control, not more. Additionally,
smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if
changes in vehicle speed are called
for. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration or braking which
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use
all available road surface to return
the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type
of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a
change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering,
acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all
four wheels on the most solid area of
the trail. Avoid reducing the tire
pressures but shift to a lower gear and
drive steadily through the terrain.
Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep
sand. This will cause the AWD system
to overheat. After the system has
cooled down, normal AWD function
will return.
Under severe operating conditions,
the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
173
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid excessive speed because
vehicle momentum can work against
you and cause the vehicle to become
stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle.
Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed
with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water,
drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the wheel
rims (for cars) or the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system
gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the
brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes.
Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying
light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in
vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles
can lose traction in slick mud. As when
you are driving over sand, apply the
accelerator slowly and avoid spinning
your wheels. If the vehicle does slide,
steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off
residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires
and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive
components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged
in water, the axle lubricant and AWD
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service
and the Bureau of Land Management
in encouraging you to help preserve
our national forest and other public
and private lands by “treading lightly.”
174
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or
turning on steep slopes or hills. A
danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possibly rolling over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do
not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make
it necessary to travel diagonally up or
down a hill or steep incline, you should
always try to drive straight up or
straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turnaround because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin
or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to avoid
excessive brake application and brake
overheating. Do not descend in
neutral; instead, disengage overdrive
or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could lose
control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
therefore apply the brakes steadily.
Do not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire
chains or cables, then it is critical that
you drive cautiously. Keep speeds
down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive
steering to reduce the chances of a
loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear
end of the vehicle slides while
cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the
vehicle.
175
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Excessive tire slippage can
cause driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over
2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can
skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving
on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the
slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power
and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator
slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well.
Although an AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t
stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident
as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient
distance between you and other
vehicles for stopping. Drive slower
than usual and consider using one of
the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake
steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do
not “pump” the brakes. See Hints on
Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 178). for more information on
the operation of the anti-lock brake
system (ABS).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems
on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable
performance whether loaded or
empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as
lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that
raise the center of gravity can make it
more likely the vehicle will rollover as
a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor
Company recommends that caution
be used with any vehicle equipped
with a high load or device (such as
ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle
properly may void the warranty,
increase your repair cost, reduce
vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver
and passenger safety. Frequent
inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the
vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
176
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is
normal. If a metal-to-metal,
continuous grinding or continuous
squeal sound is present, the brake
linings may be worn-out and should be
inspected by an authorized dealer. If
the vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, the vehicle should be
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on
the wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as
the brakes wear and does not
contribute to brake noise. See
Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
95).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 95).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from
a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake
pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce
engine power. If you experience this
condition, apply the brakes and bring
your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the
engine off, shift to position P and
apply the parking brake, and then
inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interferences. If none are found and
the condition persists, have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which
you press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long
as you press the pedal, and can
reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain
steering control during emergency
stops by keeping the brakes from
locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when the ignition
is turned on. If the light does
not illuminate during start up, remains
on or flashes, the anti-lock braking
system may be disabled and may
need to be serviced.
177
Brakes
E144522
If the system is disabled,
normal braking is still
effective. If the brake
warning lamp illuminates with the
parking brake released, have your
brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating,
the brake pedal will pulse and may
travel further. Maintain pressure on the
brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the risks
when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle
in front of you
• your vehicle is hydroplaning
• you take corners too fast
• the road surface is poor.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces
the conventional handbrake. The
operating switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission selector lever in position
P.
Note: When you apply the electric
parking brake in certain conditions e.g.
on a steep hill, the electric parking
brake may reapply the brakes within
three to ten minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises
when you apply and release the electric
parking brake. This is normal and no
cause for concern.
Applying the electric parking
brake
WARNING
If the brake system warning lamp
does not illuminate or flashes,
there could be a problem with your
electric parking brake. Have the
system checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp
will illuminate for ten seconds, if the
ignition is turned off after the electric
parking brake has been applied, or the
electric parking brake has been applied
after the ignition has been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will
not automatically apply. You must
apply the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
178
Brakes
E147230
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
Applying the electric parking
brake when the vehicle is
moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking
brake while moving will result in
use of the anti-lock braking system.
Do not use the electric parking brake
system when the vehicle is moving
unless the normal brake system is
unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the
brake pedal does not work or is
blocked), do not apply the electric
parking brake while the vehicle is
moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the
vehicle to skid out of control or off the
road.
If you apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, the brake
system warning lamp will illuminate
and a warning chime will sound. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied
as long as the switch is applied.
Releasing or pressing the switch or
pressing the accelerator pedal will
stop the braking force.
Releasing the electric parking
brake
E147231
You can release the electric parking
brake either manually by pressing the
switch or automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes
after you have released the parking
brake, there could be a problem with
you braking system. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
179
Brakes
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by turning the ignition
on, pressing the brake pedal and then
pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
When the electric parking brake is
released, the brake system warning
lamp will turn off.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the
weight of the trailer, your vehicle and
trailer may roll backwards slightly
when you start on a slope. To prevent
this from happening, do the following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in
this position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the
engine has developed sufficient
driving force.
Automatic release - drive away
release
Note: The driver's door must be closed
and the driver's safety belt must be
fastened before this feature will
operate.
Note: If the electric parking brake
warning lamp stays illuminated, the
electric parking brake will not
automatically release. You must
release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The engine must be running and
the accelerator pedal must be pressed
before the drive away release feature
will operate.
The brake system warning lamp will
go off to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive
away release makes starting on a hill
easier. This feature will release the
parking brake automatically when the
vehicle has sufficient drive force to
move up the hill. To assure drive away
release when starting uphill, press the
accelerator pedal quickly.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake
if the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge,
use jumper cables and a booster
battery.
180
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps
avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the
system applies the brakes to
individual wheels and, when needed,
reduces engine power at the same
time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose
surfaces, the system reduces engine
power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION
CONTROL
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow
or mud), turning the traction control
off may be beneficial as this allows
the wheels to spin with full engine
power. Turn off the traction control
system through the information
display. See General Information
(page 100).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected
within the AdvanceTrac system,
the stability control light will
illuminate steadily. Verify that the
AdvanceTrac system was not
manually disabled through the
information display. If the stability
control light still illuminates steadily,
have the system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Operating your vehicle with
AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when the traction control system is
turned off.
When the traction control system is
turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing
system status.
181
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire
size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may
adversely affect the performance of
the AdvanceTrac system. In addition,
installing any stereo loudspeakers
may interfere with and adversely
affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel,
and the front seats in order to
minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing
the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac
system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’ s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the
risk of personal injury or property
damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication
that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road;
WARNINGS
this could reduce the operator’s ability
to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If your AdvanceTrac system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac Control system
helps you keep control of your vehicle
when on a slippery surface. The
electronic stability control portion of
the system helps avoid skids and
lateral slides and roll stability control
helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The
traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
See Using Traction Control (page
181).
182
Stability Control
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without
AdvanceTrac skidding off its
intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac
maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
B
USING STABILITY
CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®
The system automatically activates
when you start your engine. The
AdvanceTrac system cannot be
completely turned off, but the ESC
system is disabled when the
transmission selector lever is in
position R. The traction control
portion of the system can be turned
off independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 181).
183
Stability Control
PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury,
please read and understand the
limitations of the system as contained
in this section. Sensing is only an aid
for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Traffic
control systems, inclement weather,
air brakes, and external motors and
fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury,
always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the sensing
system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is
designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not
detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as
large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that
may block the normal detection zone
of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the
sensors are covered, the system’s
accuracy can be affected. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage
to the bumper or fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone
may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false
alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey®, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. See
MyKey® (page 58).
The sensing system warns the driver
of obstacles within a certain range of
the bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever the ignition
is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning,
the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning
goes away, the radio volume returns
to the previous level.
The system can be switched off
through the information display menu
or from the pop-up message that
appears once the transmission is
shifted into R. See General
Information (page 100).
If a fault is present in the system, a
warning message appears in the
information display and does not
allow the driver to switch the faulted
system on. See Information
Messages (page 105).
184
Parking Aids
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when
the transmission is in R. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate
of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is fewer than 10
inches (25 centimeters) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If a
stationary or receding object is
detected farther than 10 inches (25
centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning
sounds again.
E130178
A
Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear
bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer
corners of the bumper.
A
The system detects certain objects
while the transmission is in R:
• and moving toward a stationary
object at a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h) or less
• but not moving, and a moving
object is approaching the rear of
the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h) or less
• and moving at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of
the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the
gearshift is in any position other than
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the
vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h).
185
Parking Aids
E130382
A
Coverage area of up to 27
inches (70 centimeters) from
the front of the vehicle and
about 6–14 inches (15–35
centimeters) to the side of
the front end of the vehicle.
Refer to the reverse sensing
section for details on
coverage area.
A
The system sounds an audible
warning when obstacles are near
either bumper in the following
manner:
• Objects detected by the front
sensors are indicated by a
high-pitched tone from the front
radio speakers.
• Objects detected by the rear
sensors are indicated by a lower
pitched tone from the rear radio
speakers.
• The sensing system reports the
obstacle which is closest to the
front or rear of the vehicle. For
example, if an obstacle is 24
inches (60 centimeters) from the
front of the vehicle and, at the
same time, an obstacle is only 16
inches (40 centimeters) from the
rear of the vehicle, the lower
pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds
from the front and rear if there are
objects at both bumpers that are
closer than 10 inches (25
centimeters).
For specific information on the reverse
sensing portion of the system, refer to
that section.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This system is designed to be a
supplementary park aid. It may
not work in all conditions and is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention and judgment. The driver is
responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and
speed, even when the system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible
for controlling the vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if required.
Note: The sensors may not detect
objects in heavy rain or other conditions
that cause disruptive reflections.
186
Parking Aids
Note: The sensors may not detect
objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves.
The system detects an available
parallel parking space and
automatically steers the vehicle into
the space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and
audibly instructs you to park the
vehicle.
The system may not function correctly
if something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (i.e. a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of
the neighboring parked vehicle is high
from the ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck
or flatbed truck).
The system should not be used if:
• a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or
trailer) is attached to the front or
rear of the vehicle or at another
location close to the sensors.
• an overhanging object (i.e.
surfboard) is attached to the roof.
• the front bumper or side sensors
are damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e.
front bumper cover).
• a mini-spare tire is in use.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button located on
the right side of the center
stack.
The touch screen displays a message
and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it's searching for a parking
space. Use the turn signal to indicate
which side of the vehicle you want the
system to search on.
Note: If the turn signal is not on, the
system automatically searches on the
vehicle's passenger side.
A
E130107
187
Parking Aids
When a suitable space is found, the
touch screen displays a message and
a chime sounds. Slow down and stop
when the touch screen displays a
message and a chime sounds (at
approximately position A), then follow
the instructions on the touch screen.
Note: You must observe that the
selected space remains clear of
obstructions at all times in the
maneuver.
Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads
(e.g. a bus or a truck), street furniture
and other items may not be detected
by active park assist. You must make
sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: The vehicle should be driven as
parallel to other vehicles as possible
while passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the
last detected parking space (i.e. if the
vehicle detects multiple spaces while
you are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately
20 mph (35 km/h), the touch screen
shows a message to alert you to reduce
vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into
Parking Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of the
vehicle.
With your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement)
and the transmission in R (Reverse),
the vehicle steers itself as instructions
to safely move the vehicle back and
forward in the space are displayed in
the touch screen. While reversing, the
touch screen displays a message
instructing you to check your
surroundings (for safety reasons) and
to back-up slowly, accompanied by a
corresponding graphic.
E130108
When you think the vehicle has
enough space in front and behind it,
or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a touch
screen display message and a chime),
bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
188
Parking Aids
When automatic steering is finished,
the touch screen displays a message
indicating that the active park assist
process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking
job and making any necessary
corrections before putting the
transmission in P (Park).
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
The system can be deactivated
manually by:
• pressing the active park assist
button
• grabbing the steering wheel
• driving above approximately 20
mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds
during an active park search
• driving above 6 mph (10 km/h)
during automatic steering
• turning off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on
a slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering
wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system,
a warning message is displayed,
followed by a chime. Occasional
system messages may occur in
normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an
authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors
There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of
the parking space
189
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The vehicle is farther than 6.5 ft (2.0 m) from the parking space
The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to
detect a parking space
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling
forward when R [Reverse] is selected)
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to
detect a parking space
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning
the vehicle properly
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly
The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs
best when you drive the same distance past the parking space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly,
improper size, or of different sizes)
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving
truck bed, etc.)
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your
vehicle passed
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated
garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
190
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is
a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of
the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible
since higher speeds might limit
your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the trunk is
ajar. If the trunk is ajar, the camera will
be out of position and the video image
may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when
the trunk is ajar.
Use caution when turning
camera features on or off while
in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle
is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides
a video image of the area behind the
vehicle. The image will be displayed
in either in the rear view mirror or the
display in the center of the instrument
panel.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s
path and proximity to objects behind
the vehicle.
E152548
The camera is located on the trunk
near the CHMSL.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you
place the transmission in R (Reverse).
The system uses three types of guides
to help you see what is behind your
vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual
path your vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line. This can
be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning your
vehicle with another object behind
you.
• Centerline (If applicable): Helps
align the center of your vehicle
with an object (i.e. a trailer).
191
Parking Aids
Note: If the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the luggage
compartment is ajar, no rear view
camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only
sees what is being towed behind your
vehicle. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some
objects might not be seen. In some
vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is
engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate
correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or
both reverse lamps are not
operating.
• The camera's view is obstructed
by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and
non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when
the transmission is not in R (Reverse):
• Menu > Vehicle > Rear View
Camera
After changing a system setting, the
touch screen shows a preview of the
selected features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed
guidelines are only available when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available
if Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
192
Parking Aids
Active guidelines are only shown with
fixed guidelines. To use active
guidelines, turn the steering wheel to
point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing,
the vehicle might deviate from the
original intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade
in and out depending on the steering
wheel position. The active guidelines
are not shown when the steering
wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to
your vehicle and objects in the green
zone are farther away. Objects are
getting closer to your vehicle as they
move from the green zone to the
yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get
better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are
ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available
when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is
not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the
video image when an object is
detected by the reverse sensing
system. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if
visual park aid alert is enabled,
highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are
ON and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the
full area behind the vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available
when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled,
only the centerline is shown.
This allows you to get a closer view of
an object behind the vehicle. The
zoomed image keeps the bumper in
the image to provide a reference. The
zoom is only active while the
transmission is in R (Reverse). When
the transmission is shifted out of R
(Reverse), the feature automatically
turns off and must be reset when it is
used again.
193
Parking Aids
Selectable settings for this feature are
OFF, Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. Press
the up and down arrows to change
the view. The selection level appears
between the buttons (i.e. Level 1). The
default setting for the manual zoom
is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
R (Reverse) and into any gear other
than P (Park), the camera image
remains in the display until the vehicle
speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This
occurs when the rear camera delay
feature is on, or until a radio button is
selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are
ON and OFF. The default setting for
the rear camera delay is OFF.
194
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in
heavy traffic, on winding roads
or when the road surface is slippery.
When you are going downhill,
your speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear
to assist the system in maintaining the
set speed.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if
the vehicle speed decreases more than
10 mph (16 km/h) below your set
speed while driving uphill.
E145976
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator will appear in
the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will
not change. When you release the
accelerator pedal, you will return to the
speed that you previously set.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-.
Release the control when you
reach the desired speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-.
The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h)
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake
pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal.
You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
195
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if
you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions,
especially when using adaptive cruise
control. Adaptive cruise control
cannot replace attentive driving.
Failing to follow any of the warnings
below or failing to pay attention to the
road may result in a collision, serious
injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a
collision warning or avoidance
system.
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect pedestrians or objects in
the roadway.
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving
a highway, in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
WARNINGS
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, rain, spray or
snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely and be in control of
the vehicle at all times.
The system is designed to
automatically adjust your speed to
maintain a proper distance between
you and the vehicle in front of you in
the same lane. You can select from
one of four gap settings.
E145977
The controls for using your cruise
control are located on the steering
wheel.
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display will
show the grey indicator light.
196
Cruise Control
E82311
The current gap setting and SET will
also display.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The
vehicle speed will be stored in the
memory.
3. The information display will show
a green indicator light, current gap
setting and desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E82312
5. A lead vehicle graphic will
illuminate if there is a vehicle
detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the set speed displayed in the
information display may vary slightly
from the speedometer.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front
of you, the vehicle will not
decelerate automatically to a stop,
nor will the vehicle always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a collision
without driver intervention. Always
apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only
warns of vehicles detected by
the radar sensor. In some cases there
may be no warning or the warning
may be delayed. The driver should
always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result
in a collision, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound
when they are being modulated by the
adaptive cruise control system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters
the same lane or a slower vehicle is
ahead in the same lane, the vehicle
speed will adjust automatically to
maintain a preset gap distance. The
distance setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will be
illuminated.
The vehicle will maintain a constant
distance between the vehicle ahead
until:
• the vehicle in front of you
accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
• the vehicle in front of you moves
out of your lane or out of view
197
Cruise Control
• the vehicle speed falls below 12
mph (20 km/h)
• a new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be
automatically applied to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. The
maximum braking which is applied by
the system is limited and can be
overridden by applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its
maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, an audible warning will
sound while the system continues to
brake. This is accompanied by a
heads-up display; a red warning bar
illuminating on the windshield. You
should take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select
a gap appropriate to the driving
conditions.
E145978
Gap decreaseA
Gap increaseB
The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you can be
decreased or increased by pressing
the gap control.
E82312
The selected gap will be displayed in
the message center as shown by the
bars in the graphic. Four gap distance
settings are available.
198
Cruise Control
Dynamic behaviorFollowing
distance at 60
mph (100 km/h)
Following
distance
Graphic display
(bars between
vehicles)
Sporty29 yards (28 m)1 second1 bar
Normal44 yards (42 m)1.5 seconds2 bars
Normal56 yards (53 m)1.9 seconds3 bars
Comfort66 yards (64 m)2.3 seconds4 bars
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the
last chosen gap for the current driver
will be automatically selected.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL.
The last set speed will be displayed
in grey but will not be erased.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding
the system by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain separation from any vehicle
ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can
be overridden by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the
system, the green indicator
light is illuminated, and the
follow vehicle is not shown in the
information display.
The system will resume operation
when you release the accelerator
pedal. The vehicle speed will decrease
to the set speed, or a lower speed if
following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release
SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until
the desired set speed is shown on
the information display. The
vehicle speed will gradually
change to the selected speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-.
The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h)
increments.
The system may apply the brakes to
slow the vehicle to the new set speed.
The set speed will display
continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
199
Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Resume should only be used if
you are aware of the set speed and
intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle
will return to the previously set speed.
The set speed will display
continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Low Speed Automatic
Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). An
audible alarm will sound and the
automatic braking will be released if
the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and
the system will shut down if it is
applying brakes for an extended period
of time. This allows the brakes to cool
down. The system will function
normally again when the brakes have
cooled down.
You should select a lower gear
position when the system is active in
situations such as prolonged downhill
driving on steep grades (i.e., driving in
mountainous areas). Additional
engine braking is needed in these
situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to
prevent them from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory is erased
when you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the
ignition.
Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all
or detect a vehicle later than expected
in some situations. The lead vehicle
graphic will not illuminate if a vehicle
is not detected in front of you.
E71621
200
Cruise Control
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different
line than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into
your lane. These vehicles can
only be detected once they
have moved fully into your
lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming
out of a bend or curve in the
road.
C
In these cases the system may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver
should stay alert and intervene when
necessary.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may
be altered causing missed or false
vehicle detections. See your
authorized dealer to have the radar
checked for proper coverage and
operation.
System Not Available
Conditions which can cause the
system to deactivate or prevent the
system from activating when
requested include:
• a blocked sensor
• high brake temperature
• a failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when
towing a trailer with brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes
will not function properly when the
system is activated because the
brakes are electronically controlled.
Failing to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
Do not use tires sizes other than
those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation
of the system. Failing to do so may
result in a loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
E145632
A message will display if the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver
side of the lower grille. A vehicle
ahead cannot be detected and the
system will not function when the
radar signals are obstructed. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being
displayed.
201
Cruise Control
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it
is no longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean but the message remains in the
display.
Do not use the system in these condi-
tion because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with
the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these condi-
tion because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the
surface of the road may interfere with
the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal
cruise control.
You are in a desert or remote area with
no other vehicles and no roadside
objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
it is possible to get a blockage warning
and not be blocked. This can happen,
for example, when driving in sparse
rural or desert environments. A false
blocked condition will either self clear
or clear after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not
brake due to slower vehicles.
Always be aware of which mode is
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from
adaptive cruise control to normal
cruise control through the information
display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator
light will replace the adaptive
cruise control indicator light
if normal cruise control is selected.
The gap setting will not be displayed,
the system will not automatically
respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking will not be
activated. The system will default to
adaptive cruise control when the
engine is started.
202
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is
designed to aid you. It is not
intended to replace your attention and
judgment. You are still responsible to
drive with due care and attention.
Note: The system will store the on/off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the
system will be active at speeds above
40 mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one
lane marking can be detected by the
camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system
may not function.
Note: The system may not be
available in poor weather or other low
visibility conditions.
The system automatically monitors
your driving behavior using various
inputs including the front camera
sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you
using a chime and a message in the
cluster display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the system on and off
By default, the system is enabled. You
may disable or re-enable the system
by selecting Setting then Driver Assist
then Driver Alert in the menu. When
activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: Note: The system will not issue
warnings below approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages.
At first the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest.
This message will only appear for a
short time. If the system detects
further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which
will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the
warning
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and
only issue a warning if required. You
can view the status at any time using
the information display. See General
Information (page 100).
The alertness level is shown by six
steps in a colored bar.
203
Driving Aids
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required.
E131359
Alertness level is critical, indicating
that a rest should be taken as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to
right as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is
approached the color turns from
green to yellow and then finally red
when a rest break should be taken.
• Green - No rest required.
• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.
• Red - Second warning.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting,
even if the current assessment is with
the typical range.
Note: The alertness level will be
shown in grey if the camera sensor
cannot track the road lane markings or
if the vehicle speed drops below
approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then
opening and closing the driver’s
door.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is
not intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need
to apply the brakes. This system does
NOT activate the brakes
automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes
may result in a collision.
The collision warning system
with brake support cannot help
prevent all collisions. Do not rely on
this system to replace driver judgment
and the need to maintain distance
and speed.
Note: The system does not detect,
warn or respond to potential collisions
with vehicles to the rear or sides of the
vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is
active at speeds above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
E156130
204
Driving Aids
This system is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. A radar
detects if your vehicle is rapidly
approaching another vehicle traveling
in the same direction as yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates
and an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the
driver in reducing the collision speed
by charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision further increases after the
warning light illuminates, the brake
support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be
apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the
brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied
even if the brake pedal is lightly
pressed.
Using the Collision Warning
System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s
brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the
vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical
braking situation.
The warning system and chime can
be turned on and off separately; the
warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible
settings by using the information
display control. See General
Information (page 100).
Note: If the system cannot be turned
off in a vehicle equipped with MyKey®,
See Principle of Operation (page 58).
Note: If collision warnings are
perceived as being too frequent or
disturbing then the warning sensitivity
can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity
would lead to fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information
(page 100).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
205
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor appears in the information
display, the radar signals from the
sensor have been obstructed. The
sensors are located behind a fascia
cover near the driver side of the lower
grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot
be detected and the collision warning
system does not function. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being
displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the
radar or remove the object causing the
obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is
dirty or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it
is no longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean but the message remains in the
display
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a
short time after the weather conditions
improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is inter-
fering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a
short time after the weather conditions
improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the
surface of the road may interfere with
the radar signals
206
Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s
brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the
vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision
warning. These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles
moving below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the
roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same
lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near
the headlamps (see blocked
sensor section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal
movements are large (very active
driving style).
•
Certain conditions may reduce the
visibility of the warning lamp;
therefore, it is recommended to keep
the audible warning on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may
be altered causing missed or false
collision warnings. See your
authorized dealer to have your
collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
The Lincoln driving experience is
delivered through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle
systems that continuously monitor
both your inputs and the road
conditions to optimize ride comfort,
steering, handling, and powertrain
response and sound.
These systems include:
• Continuously Controlled Damping
which dynamically adjusts the
shock absorbers in real time to
match the road surface and your
inputs.
• Electronically Power-Assisted
Steering which adjusts steering
effort and feel based on vehicle
speed and your inputs.
• Active Noise Control which utilizes
vehicle electronics to enhance the
acoustic experience.
• Electronic Stability Control and
Traction Control which maintain
vehicle control in adverse
conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic Throttle Control which
enhances the powertrain response
to your inputs.
207
Driving Aids
These systems have a range of modes
which you can choose from in order
to customize your ideal driving
experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience. Steering effort
is decreased, suspension
movement is more fluid. Comfort
mode is ideal when enhanced
traveling comfort is desired.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable,
controlled ride and confident
handling and powerful yet quiet
powertrain sound. This mode
provides an engaging drive
experience and a direct connection
to the road without sacrificing any
of the composure demanded from
a luxury vehicle. Unwanted noises
from the powertrain are cancelled
while desired sounds are shaped
to deliver a smooth powerful note.
This setting is ideal for everyday
use and daily driving.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. Suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control. The engine responds more
directly to your inputs and takes
on a more powerful tone. Sport
mode is intended to be used during
more spirited driving.
You can configure which of the
Adaptive Drive modes is active when
the vehicle is in D (Drive) or in S
(Sport). The configuration is retained
until modified from the main menu on
the information display. See General
Information (page 100).
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to
replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system needs to be
activated by the driver at each key
cycle.
Note: The system works above 40
mph (64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one
lane marking can be detected by the
camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system
may not function.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the
system detects no driver steering
activity for a short continuous period
of time, the system alerts the driver to
put their hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light
grip/touch on the steering wheel as
hands off driving.
The system detects unintentional
drifting toward the outside of the lane
and alerts and/or aids the driver to
stay in the lane through the steering
system and instrument cluster display.
The system automatically detects and
tracks the road lane markings using a
camera that is mounted behind the
interior rear view mirror.
208
Driving Aids
Switching the System On and
Off
Note: The system defaults to off each
time the vehicle is started, unless a
MyKey® is detected. If a MyKey® is
detected, the system is defaulted to
on and the Alert mode is automatically
selected.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected,
pressing the button will not affect the
on/off status of the system. Only the
Mode, Sensitivity and Intensity settings
can be changed when a MyKey® is
present.
To turn the system on, press
the button located on the left
steering wheel stalk. The
button must be pressed each time the
vehicle is started. The system can be
turned off by pressing the button
again.
System Settings
The system has three optional setting
menus available. To view or adjust
them, select Settings > Vehicle
Settings > Driver Assist > Lane
Keeping Sys in the left-hand
instrument cluster display using the
OK button on the steering wheel. The
last-known selection for each of these
settings is stored by the system. You
do not need to readjust your settings
each time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows the driver
to select which of the system features
will be enabled and turned on when
the button is pressed.
• Alert only – Provides a steering
wheel vibration when an
unintended lane departure is
detected.
• Aid only – Provides a steering input
toward the lane center when an
unintended lane departure is
detected.
• Both Alert + Aid
Intensity: This setting affects the
intensity of the steering wheel
vibration used for the alert and alert
+ aid modes. This setting does not
impact the aid mode.
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E151660
When the system is turned on, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with
lane markings will be displayed in the
left-hand instrument cluster display.
If the aid mode is selected when the
system is turned on, a separate white
icon will also appear in the instrument
cluster.
209
Driving Aids
When the system is turned off, the
lane marking graphics will not be
displayed.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic
may still be displayed if adaptive cruise
control is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of
the lane markings will change to
indicate the system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a
warning or intervention on the
indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• the vehicle is under the activation
speed
• the turn indicator is active
• the vehicle is in a dynamic
maneuver
• the road has no or poor lane
markings in the camera
field-of-view
• the camera is obscured or unable
to detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (e.g.
significant sun angles or shadows,
snow, heavy rain, fog), traffic
conditions (e.g. following a large
vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (e.g. poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a
warning or intervention, on the
indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping alert warning.
The system can be temporarily
suppressed at any time by the
following:
• Quick braking
• Fast acceleration
• Using the turn signal indicator
• Evasive steering maneuver
210
Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the
lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the
lane markings on the road?
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
When driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
211
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as
expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has
been modified
BLIND SPOT MONITOR
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic
Alert (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use
the BLIS as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors
and looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. BLIS is not a
replacement for careful driving and
only an assist.
A
A
E124788
BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot
zone (A). The detection area is on
both sides of the vehicle, extending
rearward from the exterior mirrors to
approximately 10 feet (3 meters)
beyond the bumper. The system alerts
you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of
vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent
contact with other vehicles or objects;
or to detect parked vehicles, people,
animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees, etc.). It is designed to
alert the driver to vehicles in the blind
zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
212
Driving Aids
Using the Systems
BLIS turns on when the engine is
started and the vehicle is driven
forward above 5 mph (8 km/h); it
remains on while the transmission is
in D (Drive) and N (Neutral). If shifted
out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the
system enters cross traffic alert mode.
Once shifted back into D (Drive), BLIS
turns back on when the vehicle is
driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: BLIS does not function in R
(Reverse) or P (Park) or provide any
additional warning when a turn signal
is on.
Note: Cross traffic alert detects
approaching vehicles from up to 45
feet (14 meters) away though coverage
decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury,
NEVER use the cross traffic alert
system as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before
backing out of a parking space. Cross
traffic alert is not a replacement for
careful driving and only an assist.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is
only partially obstructed; zone
coverage is nearly maximized.
213
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the
left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone
coverage on that side is severely
limited.
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The BLIS and cross traffic alert
systems illuminate a yellow alert
indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of the vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when
nighttime darkness is detected.
Cross traffic alert also sounds an
audible warning and a message
appears in the information display
indicating a vehicle is coming from the
right or left. Cross traffic alert works
with the reverse sensing system which
sounds its own series of tones. See
Parking Aid (page 184).
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system
recognizing a blocked condition
and alerting the driver, the number of
missed objects will increase. To help
avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS as
a replacement for using the side and
rear view mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS
is not a replacement for careful driving
and only an assist.
214
Driving Aids
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this
is rare and known as a false blockage
warning. A false blocked condition
either self-corrects or clears after a key
cycle.
E142443
The system uses radar sensors which
are located behind the bumper fascia
on each side of your vehicle. Do not
allow these areas to become
obstructed by mud, snow or bumper
stickers, as this can cause degraded
system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message
warning of a blocked sensor or a
message warning of low visibility will
appear in the information display and
the alert indicator illuminates in the
appropriate mirror(s). The information
display warning can be cleared but
the alert indicator remains
illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the
system can be reset in two ways:
• when at least two objects are
detected while driving, or
• turn the ignition from on to off,
then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the
key cycle, the system senses again
that it is blocked after driving in traffic.
Reasons for messages being
displayed
Clean the fascia area in
front of the radar or
remove the obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic
for a few minutes to
allow the radar to detect
passing vehicles so it can
clear the blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty
or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically
resets to an unblocked
state once the rainfall or
snowfall rate decreases
or stops. Do not use BLIS
or cross traffic alert in
these conditions.
Heavy
rainfall/
snowfall
interferes
with the
radar
signals
System Limitations
The BLIS and cross traffic alert
systems do have their limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the
sensor area may limit vehicle
detection.
215
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that
may limit the BLIS:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind
zone at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind
zone.
The following are other situations that
may limit the cross traffic alert
system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or
objects obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24
km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 5
mph (8 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking
spot.
False Alerts
Note: If a trailer is connected to the
vehicle the BLIS system may detect the
trailer causing a false alert. You may
want to turn the BLIS off manually.
There may be certain instances when
either the BLIS or cross traffic alert
systems illuminate the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone;
this is known as a false alert. Some
amount of false alerts are normal;
they are temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with
the left or right sensor, the BLIS
telltale will illuminate and a message
will appear in the information display.
All other system faults will only be
displayed by a message in the
information display.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched
off temporarily by using the
information display control. See
General Information (page 100).
When the BLIS is switched off, you will
not receive alerts and a telltale
illuminates in the information display.
Note: The CTA system always
switches on whenever the ignition is
switched on. However, the BLIS system
will remember the last selected on or
off setting.
One or both systems cannot be
switched off when MyKey is used. See
General Information (page 337).
One or both systems can also be
switched off permanently at your
authorized dealer. Once switched off,
switching it back on must also be
done at your authorized dealer.
216
Driving Aids
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
Obtain immediate service if a
system error is detected. You
may not notice any difference in the
feel of your steering, but a serious
condition may exist. Failure to do so
may result in loss of steering control.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with an
electric power-assisted steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir to
check or fill.
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to
ensure proper operation of the
electronic system. When an electronic
error is detected, a message will be
displayed in the information display.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
After at least 10 seconds, reset the
system by restarting the engine, and
watch the information display for a
steering message. If a steering
message returns, or returns while
driving, take the vehicle to your dealer
to have it checked.
If your vehicle loses electrical power
while you are driving (or if the ignition
is turned off), you can steer the
vehicle manually, but it takes more
effort. Extreme continuous steering
may increase the effort it takes for you
to steer. This occurs to prevent
internal overheating and permanent
damage to your steering system. If this
should occur, you will neither lose the
ability to steer the vehicle manually
nor will it cause permanent damage.
Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to
cool and steering assist will return to
normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check
for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension
components
• loose or worn steering
components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the
steering seem to wander or pull.
217
Driving Aids
Adaptive Learning
The EPS system adaptive learning
helps correct for road irregularities
and improves overall handling and
steering feel. It communicates with
the vehicle's brake system to help
operate advanced stability control
and accident avoidance systems.
Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery
installed, the vehicle must be driven
a short distance before the strategy
is relearned and all systems are
reactivated.
218
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle loading - with and
without a trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
219
Load Carrying
installed equipment has been
installed on the vehicle, the weight
of the equipment must be
subtracted from the payload
listed on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more cargo,
even if there is space available.
Overloading or improperly loading
your vehicle can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E142516
E142517
220
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight – includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) – including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label
shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next
to the driver's seating position.
The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized
dealer.
E143818
GVW
221
Load Carrying
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo
+ passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). The GVWR is shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label
shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next
to the driver's seating position.
Example only:
E142523
222
Load Carrying
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could
result in substandard vehicle handling
or performance, engine, transmission
and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control
and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the weight of the loaded
vehicle (GVW) plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) -is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer -including
all cargo and passengers - that
the vehicle can handle without
risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is
223
Load Carrying
rated for operation at GVWR, not
at GCWR.) Separate functional
brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for
trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the GVWR of the towing
vehicle. The GCW must never
exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with only mandatory
options, no cargo (internal or
external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer), and driver only (150
lb. [68 kg]). Consult your
authorized dealer (or the RV
and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 lb. (2268
kg) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a
proper tongue load range of 500
to 750 lb. (227 to 340 kg). For an
11500 lb. (5216 kg) fifth wheel
trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25
to obtain a proper king pin load
range of 1725 to 2875 lb. (782 to
1304 kg).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
224
Load Carrying
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.). In metric units (635-340
(5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400
lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing.
Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all
the golf bags? You and four
friends average 220 lb. (99 kg)
each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg)
each. The calculation would be:
1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400
- 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635 kg
- (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635
- 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400
lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your
friends decide to pick up cement
from the local home improvement
store to finish that patio you have
been planning for the past 2 years.
Measuring the inside of the vehicle
with the rear seat folded down,
you have room for 12-100 lb. (45
kg) bags of cement. Do you have
enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you
and your friend each weigh 220 lb.
(99 kg), the calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No,
you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the
225
Load Carrying
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2
x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198
- 540 = -103 kg. You will need to
reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would
be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now
you have the load capacity to
transport the cement and your
friend home. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2
x 99 kg) - (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198
- 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position.
226
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of the
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: There may be electrical items
such as fuses or relays that can affect
trailer towing operation. See Fuses
(page 251).
Weight, not volume designates your
vehicle's load capacity. You cannot
necessarily use all available space
when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and
suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and
after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects the vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items in the
center of the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue
weight to go above or below
10-15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected,
the trailer frame should be level,
or slightly angled down toward the
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or payload,
a slight takeoff vibration or shudder
may be present due to the increased
payload weight. Additional
information regarding proper trailer
loading and setting your vehicle up for
towing is located in another chapter
of this manual. See Load Limit (page
219). You can also find the information
in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide,
available at your authorized dealer.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do
not exceed 20 feet
2
(1.86 meters
2
).
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
227
Towing
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight.
The maximum trailer weights listed
may be limited to this specified weight,
as the vehicle’s electrical system may
not include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer
provided the maximum trailer weight
is less than or equal to the maximum
trailer weight listed for your vehicle
configuration on the following charts.
Maximum Trailer Weight - lb (kg)
*
Powertrain
1000 (454)2.0L GTDI
1000 (454)3.7L TiVCT
*
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
228
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING
CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe
towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive
your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle
laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included
with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more
frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer
to your scheduled maintenance
information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire
label and Safety Compliance label as
well as instructions on calculating
your vehicle's load in another chapter
of this manual. See Load Limit (page
219).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total
vehicle weight.
Hitches
• Do not use a hitch that either
clamps onto the bumper or
attaches to the axle.
• Distribute the trailer load so
10-15% of the total trailer weight
is on the trailer tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to
the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety
chains to the hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains,
cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle's brake system. Your
vehicle may not have enough braking
power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual,
automatic or surge-type trailer brakes,
when installed properly and adjusted
to the manufacturer's specifications,
are safe to use. The trailer brakes
must meet local and federal
regulations.
229
Towing
The braking system of the tow
vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Separate functioning brake
systems are required for safe
control of towed vehicles and
trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when
loaded.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most
towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and
hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental
agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and
backing-up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before
starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels clear
curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500
miles (800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical
connections and trailer wheel lug
nuts thoroughly after you have
traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or
heavy traffic during hot weather,
place the gearshift in position P to
aid engine and transmission
cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with
heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off
automatically when you are towing
on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving
down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as
they may overheat and become
less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped
with a grade assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when
towing. This provides engine
braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping
with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
230
Towing
• Avoid parking on a grade.
• However, if you must park on a
grade:
• Turn the steering wheel to point
the vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
• Set the vehicle parking brake.
• Place automatic transmission
in position P.
• Place wheel chocks in front and
back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not equipped with
vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat
or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the
trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the
trailer after you remove the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during
boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level
to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow
water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting drivability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in
water, replace the rear axle lubricant.
Water may contaminate the rear axle
lubricant, which is not a normal
maintenance inspection item unless
there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE
VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle
towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a
roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
231
Towing
We recommend using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not
tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. If towed
incorrectly, or by any other means,
vehicle damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a
towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck
operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to tow a front-wheel
drive (FWD) vehicle from the front if
using proper wheel lift equipment to
raise the front wheels off the ground.
The rear wheels can remain on the
ground when towed in this fashion.
FWD vehicles can also be towed from
the rear using wheel lift equipment;
however, the front wheels must be
placed on a dolly to prevent damage
to the transmission.
It is required to tow an all-wheel drive
(AWD) vehicle with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment, with all
the wheels off the ground, to prevent
damage to the transmission, AWD
system or vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the
ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so
you tow it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in
position N. If you cannot place the
transmission in position N, you
may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 165).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56
km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system
in recirculated air mode to prevent
exhaust fumes from entering the
vehicle. See Climate Control (page
126).
Follow these guidelines if you have a
need for recreational (RV) towing. An
example of recreational towing would
be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are to
make sure you do not damage the
transmission during towing.
232
Towing
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.0L
Engine
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground) as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. You
must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using
a tow dolly, follow the instructions
specified by the equipment provider.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
CANNOT be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground), as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is
recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground
such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, you cannot tow your
vehicle.
Vehicles Equipped with a 3.7L
Engine
You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground using the
Neutral Tow feature, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Neutral Tow
Enter Neutral Tow mode by doing the
following:
1. Put the ignition in accessory mode
by pressing the engine START
button without pressing the brake
pedal.
2. Select Neutral Tow under the
Vehicle Settings menu in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
3. Press and hold the OK button to
start the neutral tow process.
4. Press the brake pedal and select
N on the push-button
transmission.
5. Turn the ignition off by pressing the
engine START button without
pressing the brake pedal.
If the process is completes
successfully:
• the N on the push-button
transmission blinks slowly
• Neutral Tow Engaged turn
ignition off for towing appears
in the information display.
Note: If the parking brake is applied,
Neutral Tow remove park brake for
towing appears in the information
display.
Note: Do not exceed 65 mph (105
km/h).
Note: Start the engine and allow it to
run for five minutes at the beginning of
each day and every six hours (or fewer).
Shut the engine off and verify that
Neutral tow engaged appears in the
display before continuing to tow.
233
Towing
Exit Neutral Tow mode, make sure the
ignition is on (engine can be on or off),
press the brake pedal and select P on
the push-button transmission.
If the process is completed
successfully, Neutral Tow
disengaged appears in the
information display and both the
instrument cluster and push-button
transmission display P.
234
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your
vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary
your speed frequently and change up
through the gears early. Do not labor
the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several
things such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how
you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind
that may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a
smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down
may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to
the furthest destination first
and then work your way back
home.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
(Traveling at 65 mph/105 kph uses
about 15% less fuel than traveling
at 75 mph/121 kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and
use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may
want to avoid doing because they
reduce your fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard
accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before
turning off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on
cold mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning
and heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every
400 lbs [180 kilograms] of weight
carried).
• Avoid adding particular
accessories to your vehicle (e.g.
bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars,
running boards, ski racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out
of alignment.
235
Driving Hints
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note: Driving through deep water
above the recommended levels can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Once through the water, always
dry the brakes by moving your vehicle
slowly while applying light pressure on
the brake pedal. Wet brakes do not
stop the vehicle as quickly as dry
brakes.
E142667
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that
is higher than the bottom of the wheel
rims (for cars) or the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction
or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s
air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall.
FLOOR MATS
E142666
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed.
Only use floor mats that are firmly
secured to retention posts so that
they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely
can cause loss of vehicle control
and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to
the retention posts in the carpet that
are supplied with your vehicle. Floor
mats must be properly secured to
both retention posts to ensure mats
do not shift out of position.
236
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any
other covering in the vehicle foot
well that cannot be properly secured
to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the
ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any
other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats
should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another
floor mat or other covering. Additional
floor mats or any other covering will
reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal
operation.
Check attachment of floor mats
on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor
mats that have been removed for
cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot
well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a
loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor
mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
To install floor mats, position the
floor mat so that the eyelet is
over the retention post and press
down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse
the installation procedure.
237
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In The U.S.:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. The service is
available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week.
• for the coverage period listed on
the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner's Manual
portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• battery jump start.
• lock-out assistance (key
replacement cost is the customer's
responsibility).
• fuel delivery — Independent
Service Contractors, if not
prohibited by state, local or
municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gallons (7.5L) of gasoline or
5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel
to a disabled vehicle. Fuel delivery
service is limited to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month
period.
• winch out — available within 100
feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no
recoveries.
• towing — Ford and Lincoln eligible
vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of
the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a
member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35
miles (56 km) from the
disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any
mileage costs in excess of 35 miles
(56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200
if the disabled eligible vehicle requires
service at the nearest authorized
dealer. If the trailer is disabled, but the
towing vehicle is operational, the
trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In The U.S. :
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card
is found in the owner's information
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
238
Roadside Emergencies
If you need to arrange roadside
assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable
amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km).
To obtain reimbursement information,
U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers call
1-800-521-4140. Customers will be
asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold In Canada :
Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require
roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada,
the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and
benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your
Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on
Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to
obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website
at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery will lose charge.
There may be insufficient power to
restart your engine.
The hazard warning button
is located on the instrument
panel. Use it when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the
hazard warning function, and the
front and rear direction indicators
will flash.
• Press the button again to turn
them off.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING
Failure to inspect and if
necessary repair fuel leaks after
a collision may increase the risk of fire
and serious injury. Ford Motor
Company recommends that the fuel
system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle is equipped with
a fuel pump shut-off feature that
stops the flow of fuel to the engine.
Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle
by doing the following:
239
Roadside Emergencies
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition to crank.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Turn the ignition on again to
re-enable the fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push
button start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button
to turn the ignition off.
2. Press the brake pedal and press
the START/STOP button (crank
attempt).
3. Remove your foot from the brake
pedal and press the
START/STOP button (ignition
off).
4. Press the START/STOP button
again to re-enable the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE
VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery
can explode if exposed to
flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An
explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid
which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Only use an adequate sized
cable with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start
your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery
of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the
hood of the disabled vehicle, making
sure the two vehicles do not touch.
Turn all accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel
lines, engine rocker covers, the
intake manifold or electrical
components as grounding points. Stay
clear of moving parts.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on
the bottom is used to designate the
booster vehicle.
240
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle's
engine.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster
vehicle and rev the engine
moderately.
2. Start the engine of the disabled
vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has
been started, run both engines for
an additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order that they were
connected.
241
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle's battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been
started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several
minutes so the battery can recharge.
242
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES
YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must
be performed by an authorized dealer.
While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty
service, we recommend you return to
your selling authorized dealer who
wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty
repairs require special training and
equipment, so not all authorized
dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your
vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed
to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer.
Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured
or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or
use the online resources listed below
to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources
are available online at
www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can
be found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada,
Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or
are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
243
Customer Assistance
1. Contact your Sales Representative
or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or
Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or
clarification on Ford Motor
Company policies, please contact
the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.
In order to help you serve you better,
please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home
and business).
• The name of the authorized dealer
and city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer
reading.
In some states, you must directly
notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty
laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair
attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty
dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or
to the extent allowed by state law,
before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by
certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required
prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act
or state replacement or repurchase
laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a
motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty
after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or
repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the
actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The
consumer has the right to choose
whether to receive a refund or
replacement vehicle.
244
Customer Assistance
California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) presumes that the
manufacturer has had a reasonable
number of attempts to conform the
vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle
or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are
made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious
bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are
made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that
substantially impairs the use, value
or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for
repair of nonconformities for a
total of more than 30 calendar
days (not necessarily all at one
time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the
consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the
repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your
warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil
Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also
required to use BBB AUTO LINE before
exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15
U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and
remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort
to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by
those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If
a warranty concern has not been
resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you
need section, you may be eligible to
participate in the BBB AUTO LINE
program.
245
Customer Assistance
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists
of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a
representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to
explore options for settlement of the
claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want
to participate in mediation, and if your
claim is eligible, you may participate
in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled
so that you can present your case in
an informal setting before an impartial
person. The arbitrator will consider
the testimony provided and make a
decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO
LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your
claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the
decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose
to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the
decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of
your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using
the information provided below,
please call or write to request a
program application. You will be
asked for your name and address,
general information about your new
vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you
have already taken to try to resolve
them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be
completed, signed and returned to the
BBB along with proof of ownership.
Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program
Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also
be requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship
Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to
discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
246
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the
efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a
factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory,
Ford of Canada participates in an
impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight
forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement
when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure
is without cost to you and is designed
to eliminate the need for lengthy and
expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times
and places in an informal
environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast,
fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award
is binding on both you and Ford of
Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge
or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at
1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a
foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or
consulate. These officials can inform
you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find
unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can
only get fuel with an anti-knock index
lower than is recommended for your
vehicle, contact a regional office or
owner relations/customer relationship
office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your
emission control system and may
cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor
Company/Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused
by use of improper fuel. Using leaded
fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the
U.S.
247
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while
you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan
Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer.
If the authorized dealer cannot help
you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS &
GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America
Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free
Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If your vehicle must be serviced while
you are traveling or living in Puerto
Rico, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot
help you, contact:
Ford International Business
Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while
you are traveling or living in the Middle
East, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot
help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North
America and then relocate to any of
the above locations, register your
vehicle identification number (VIN)
and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing
expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer.
If the authorized dealer employees
cannot help you, they can direct you
to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this
portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated
at:
248
Customer Assistance
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog,
call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m.
EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be
reached by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be
purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be
obtained from your authorized dealer
or by contacting Helm, Incorporated
using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
249
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspxWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
250
Customer Assistance
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one
that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher
amperage rating can cause severe
wire damage and could start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by
a broken wire within the fuse. Check
the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro
fuses
Micro fusesFuse rating
--TanTan5A
--BrownBrown7.5A
--RedRed10A
-GreyBlueBlue15A
BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A
WhiteWhite-White25A
PinkPink-Green30A
GreenGreen--40A
Red---50A
Yellow---60A
251
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION
CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery
before servicing high-current
fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling
fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the
engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 277).
E144783
The high-current fuses are coded as
follows:
252
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Not used (spare)
25A
3
1
Starter relay-2
Autowipers
15A
1
3
Blower motor relay-4
Power point 3 - Back of console
20A
3
5
Not used-6
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 1
20A
1
7
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 2
20A
1
8
Powertrain control module relay-9
Power point 1 - driver front
20A
3
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 4
15A
2
11
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 3
15A
2
12
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 5
10A
2
13
Powertrain control module - vehicle
power 6
10A
2
14
Run/start relay-15
Power point 2 - console
20A
3
16
Not used-17
Powertrain control module - keep
alive power
10A
1
18
253
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Electronic power assist steering
10A
1
19
Run/start lighting
10A
1
20
Run/start transmission control,
Transmission oil pump start/stop
15A
1
21
Air conditioner clutch solenoid
10A
1
22
Blind spot information system, Rear
view camera, Adaptive cruise control,
Heads-up display, Shifter
15A
1
23
Not used-24
Anti-lock brake system
10A
2
25
Powertrain control module
10A
2
26
Not used-27
Not used-28
Not used-29
Not used-30
Not used-31
Electronic fan #1 relay-32
Air conditioner clutch relay-33
Not used-34
Not used-35
Not used-36
Not used-37
Electronic fan #2 relay-38
Electronic fan #3 relay-39
254
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Fuel pump relay-40
Horn relay-41
Not used-42
Not used-43
Not used-44
Not used-45
Alternator
10A
2
46
Brake on/off switch
10A
2
47
Horn
20A
1
48
Mass air flow monitor
5A
1
49
Not used-50
Not used-51
Not used-52
Power seats
10A
1
53
Not used-54
Not used-55
1
Micro fuse
2
Dual micro fuse
3
M-type fuse
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom
of the fuse box. To access the bottom
of the fuse box, do the following:
255
Fuses
E145983
1. Release the two latches, located
on both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse
box from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the
center of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse
box to access the bottom side.
The high-current fuses are coded as
follows:
256
Fuses
E144949
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Fuel pump feed
30A
1
56
Not used-57
Not used-58
500W electronic fan 3
30A
1
59
500W electronic fan 1
30A
1
60
Not used-61
Body control module 1
50A
2
62
500W electronic fan 2
20A
1
63
Not used-64
257
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Front heated seat
20A
1
65
Not used-66
Body control module 2
50A
2
67
Heated rear window
40A
1
68
Anti-lock brake system valves
30A
1
69
Passenger seat
30A
1
70
Not used-71
Panoramic roof #1
30A
1
72
Rear climate controlled seats
20A
1
73
Driver seat module
30A
1
74
Not used-75
Transmission oil pump #2 stop/start
20A
1
76
Front climate controlled seats
30A
1
77
Not used-78
Blower motor
40A
1
79
Power trunk
30A
1
80
Inverter
40A
1
81
Anti-lock brake system pump
60A
2
82
Wiper motor #1
25A
1
83
258
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Starter solenoid
30A
1
84
Panoramic roof #2
30A
1
85
1
M-type fuse
2
J-type fuse
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
column.
E145984
The fuses are coded as follows:
259
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Lighting (ambient, glovebox, vanity,
dome, trunk)
10A
1
1
Memory seats, Lumbar, Power mirror
7.5A
1
2
Driver door unlock
20A
1
3
Not used (spare)
5A
1
4
Subwoofer amplifier, THX amplifier
20A
1
5
Not used (spare)
10A
2
6
Not used (spare)
10A
2
7
Not used (spare)
10A
2
8
Not used (spare)
10A
2
9
Power trunk logic
5A
2
10
Not used (spare)
5A
2
11
Climate control, Gear shift
7.5A
2
12
Steering wheel column, Cluster,
Datalink logic
7.5A
2
13
Not used (spare)
10A
2
14
Datalink/Gateway module
10A
2
15
Not used (spare)
15A
1
16
Not used (spare)
5A
2
17
Ignition, Push button stop/start
5A
2
18
260
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Passenger airbag disabled indicator,
Transmission range
5A
2
19
Adaptive headlamps
5A
2
20
Humidity and in-car temperature, Rear
climate seats
5A
2
21
Occupant classification sensor
5A
2
22
Delayed accessory (power inverter
logic, moonroof logic)
10A
1
23
Central lock/unlock
30A
1
24
Driver's door (window, mirror)
30A
1
25
Front passenger's door (window,
mirror)
30A
1
26
Moonroof
30A
1
27
THX amplifier
20A
1
28
Rear driver side door (window)
30A
1
29
Rear passenger side door (window)
30A
1
30
Not used (spare)
15A
1
31
GPS, Voice control, Display, Adaptive
cruise control, Radio frequency
receiver
10A
1
32
Radio, Active noise control
20A
1
33
Run/start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35,
36, 37, circuit breaker)
30A
1
34
Restraints control module
5A
1
35
261
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay
number
Continuous control damping suspen-
sion, Auto-dimming rear view mirror
15A
1
36
All-wheel drive relay, Heated steering
wheel
15A
1
37
Rear window shade30A38
1
Micro fuse
2
Dual micro fuse
262
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly
to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large
network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained
technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and
expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools
developed specifically for servicing
your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking
routine service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
If your vehicle requires professional
service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and
service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels,
lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications.
Motorcraft® parts are designed and
built to provide the best performance
in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets
caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you
have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other
burning material (such as
cigarettes) away from the battery
and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to
P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the
key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle
damage and/or personal burn
injuries, do not start your engine with
the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to
P (Park).
2. Block the wheels
263
Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING
THE HOOD
E142457
1. To open the hood, go inside the
vehicle and pull the hood release
handle located under the
instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
find the secondary release lever,
which is located under the front of
the hood, near the Lincoln badge.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing
the secondary release lever to your
left, toward the passenger side of
the vehicle.
4. Raise the hood. A gas strut will
support the hood.
5. To close the hood, lower the hood
and allow it to drop the last 8 to 11
inches (20 to 30 centimeters).
Note: Make sure that the hood is
closed properly.
264
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
E144364
Engine coolant reservoir capA
Engine oil dipstickB
Engine oil filler capC
Brake fluid reservoir capD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Engine air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capH
265
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
E153064
Engine coolant reservoir capA
Engine oil filler capB
Brake fluid reservoir capC
BatteryD
Power distribution boxE
Air filter housingF
Transmission fluid dipstickG
Engine oil dipstickH
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capI
266
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
E142462
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™/3.7L
Note: Check the level before starting
the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on
level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Replace the dipstick and remove
it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap
when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
MAX mark. Oil levels above the MAX
mark may cause engine damage.
E142732
267
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline
engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised
of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 325).
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until
you feel a strong resistance.
Resetting the Oil Life
Monitoring System
Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only
after an oil change.
1. Turn the ignition key to the on
position. Do not start the engine.
For vehicles with push-button
start, press and hold the start
button for two seconds without
pressing the brake pedal. Do not
attempt to start the engine.
2. Press both the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time.
3. Keep both pedals fully pressed.
4. After three seconds, the Service:
Oil reset in prog. message will be
displayed.
5. After 25 seconds, the Service: Oil
reset complete message will be
displayed.
6. Release both the accelerator and
brake pedals.
7. The Service: Oil reset complete
message will no longer be
displayed.
8. Rotate the key to the off position.
For vehicles with push-button
start, press the start button to turn
the vehicle off completely.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK -
2.0L ECOBOOST™/3.7L
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page
440).
Note: Make sure that the level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot.
The level may extend beyond the MAX
mark
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark,
below the MIN mark, or empty, add
coolant immediately. See Adding
Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%,
which equates to a freeze point
between -30 F degrees (-34 C) and
-34 F (-37 C).
268
Maintenance
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool
300-ROB75240 available from your
authorized dealer. Ford does not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring
coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine
coolant or antifreeze or windshield
washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when
the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot
cooling system can burn you badly.
Also, you can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the
windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal
injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling
system is under pressure; steam and
hot liquid can come out forcefully
when the cap is loosened slightly.
Do not add coolant further than
the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets,
cooling system sealants, or additives
as they can cause damage to the
engine cooling or heating systems. This
damage would not be covered under
your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation,
the engine coolant may change color
from orange to pink or light red. As long
as the engine coolant is clear and
uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the engine coolant
has degraded nor does it require the
engine coolant to be drained, the
system to be flushed, or the engine
coolant to be replaced.
• Do not mix different colors or types
of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used.
Mixing of engine coolants may
harm your engine’ s cooling system.
The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void
the warranty. Use prediluted
engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 325).
• In case of emergency, a large
amount of water without engine
coolant may be added in order to
reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, the cooling system
must be drained, chemically
cleaned with Motorcraft®
Premium Cooling System Flush,
and refilled with prediluted engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water
alone (without engine coolant)
can cause engine damage from
corrosion, overheating or freezing.
269
Maintenance
• Do not use alcohol, methanol,
brine or any engine coolants mixed
with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and
other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or
additives to the coolant. These can
be harmful and compromise the
corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant
meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications
(page 325).
Whenever coolant has been added,
the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next
few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not
recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.
Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s regulations and
standards for recycling and disposing
of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze
protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in
non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
270
Maintenance
What you Should Know About
Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is
depleted, this feature allows the
vehicle to be driven temporarily before
incremental component damage is
incurred. The “fail-safe” distance
depends on ambient temperatures,
vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the
engine will automatically switch to
alternating cylinder operation. Each
disabled cylinder acts as an air pump
and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing
steering and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools,
the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring the vehicle to
rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, the vehicle will have limited
power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine
power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may
increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
You have limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will
not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run
rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down
automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken
to an authorized dealer.
271
Maintenance
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and
replenish if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without
repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be
checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an
authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not
have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid and
filter at the correct service interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page
440). Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission
is not working properly, or if you notice
some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials
may affect transmission operation
and result in damage to internal
transmission components.
6F35/HF35 transmission (If
Equipped)
Note: Transmission fluid should be
checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an
authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not
have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals
for fluid checks and changes. Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be
checked if the transmission is not
working properly, (For example: if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly) or
if you notice some sign of fluid
leakage. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials
may affect transmission operation
and result in damage to internal
transmission components.
6F50/6F55 Transmission (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
The dipstick cap and surrounding
components may be hot; gloves
are recommended.
Use gloves when moving the air
filter assembly. Components will
be hot.
272
Maintenance
Note: Automatic transmission fluid
expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle
until it is warmed up (approximately
20 miles [30 kilometers]). If your
vehicle has been operated for an
extended period at high speeds, in city
traffic during hot weather or pulling a
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off
until normal operating temperatures
are reached to allow the fluid to cool
before checking. Depending on vehicle
use, cooling times could take up to 30
minutes or longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals
for fluid checks and changes. Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be
checked if the transmission is not
working properly. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or
if you notice some sign of fluid
leakage.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30
kilometers) or until it reaches
normal operating temperature
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface
and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged
and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the
gearshift lever through all of the
gear ranges. Allow a minimum of
10 seconds for each gear to
engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park)
and leave the engine running.
Note: You will need to move the air
filter assembly to access the
transmission dipstick.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it
clean with a clean, dry lint free rag.
If necessary, refer to Under hood
overview in this chapter for the
location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it
is fully seated in the filler tube by
turning it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect
the fluid level. The fluid should be
in the designated areas for normal
operating temperature.
Moving the Air Filter Assembly
(Accessing the Dipstick)
WARNING
Do not run engine with the air
filter disconnected.
273
Maintenance
E158839
A
B
C
D
1. Shut the engine off.
2. Clean the area around the clamp
that connects the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose (A).
E158840
3. Remove the bolt cover (if
equipped).
4. Remove two bolts that attach the
air filter assembly to the front of
the vehicle (B).
5. Loosen the clamp holding the air
filter assembly to the rubber hose
(A).
6. Remove the harness retaining clip
by pulling up (C). Do not
disconnect the sensor (D).
7. Without disconnecting the sensor
(D), pull the air filter assembly up
to disconnect the air filter
assembly from the seated
grommets located underneath the
air filter assembly.
E158841
8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90
degrees counterclockwise and
reinstall into the rubber hose.
9. Tighten the clamp (A).
10. The transmission fluid level
indicator can now be accessed.
274
Maintenance
Checking the fluid level
Low fluid level
E158842
If the fluid level is below the MIN range
of the dipstick, add fluid to reach the
hash mark level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN
level, do not drive the vehicle. An
underfill condition may cause shift or
engagement concerns or possible
damage.
Correct fluid level
E158843
The transmission fluid should be
checked at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The
normal operating temperature can be
reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 kilometers) of driving.
The transmission fluid level should be
targeted within the cross-hatch area
if at normal operating temperature
180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C).
High fluid level
E158844
If the fluid level is above the MAX
range of the dipstick, remove fluid to
reach the hashmark level.
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level
may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage. High
fluid levels can be caused by an
overheating condition. If your vehicle
has been operated for an extended
period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer,
the vehicle should be turned off until
normal operating temperatures are
reached. Depending on vehicle use,
cooling times could take up to 30
minutes or longer.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission
Fluid Levels
E158845
275
Maintenance
E158846
Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid
used is normally indicated on the
dipstick and also in the Technical
Specifications section in this chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift or
engagement concerns or possible
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials
may affect transmission operation
and result in damage to internal
transmission components. Reinstall
the air filter assembly. After the fluid
level has been checked and adjusted
as necessary, do the following:
1. Shut the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air
filter assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly 90
degrees clockwise without
disconnecting the sensor.
4. Seat the air filter assembly back
into the grommets by pushing
down on the air filter assembly.
5. Tighten the clamp.
6. Install and tighten two bolts that
attach air filter assembly to the
front of the vehicle.
7. Install the bolt cover (if equipped).
8. Reinstall the harness retaining clip
into the front of the air filter
assembly.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating
range; there is no need to add fluid. If
the fluid levels are outside of the
normal operating range, the
performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your
authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electric power steering (EPS) system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or
fill.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a
lifetime fuel filter that is integrated
with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
276
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer
systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level
is low. Only use a washer fluid that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications
(page 325).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common
windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents
should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without
damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,
wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V
BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce
explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect
your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on
the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and/or damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact
with skin or eyes, flush immediately
with water for a minimum of 15
minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
277
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft® maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its life
of service.
Note: If your battery has a
cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or
replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation,
keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery
cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery
or terminals, remove the cables from
the terminals and clean with a wire
brush. You can neutralize the acid with
a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you
plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
To ensure proper operation of the
battery management system (BMS),
any electrical devices that are added
to the vehicle should not have their
ground connection made directly at
the negative battery post. A
connection at the negative battery
post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect
system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic
accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner
may adversely affect battery
performance and durability and may
also affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is
required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended
replacement battery that matches
the electrical requirements of the
vehicle.
When the battery is disconnected or
a new battery installed, the automatic
transmission must relearn its adaptive
strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly when
first driven. This operation is
considered normal and will fully
update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected
or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations
must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized standards
for disposal. Call your local authorized
recycling center to find out more about
recycling automotive batteries.
278
Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the
edge of the blade to check for
roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer
fluid or water applied with a soft
sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually
moved when the ignition is off. This
allows for ease of blade replacement
and cleaning under the blades.
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
E129990
1
1
2
2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper
blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade
locks into place. Lower the wiper arm
and blade back to the windshield. The
wiper arms will automatically return to
their normal position when the ignition
is turned on.
To change the rear blades, do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm.
E130060
3
2
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm.
3. Disengage the wiper blade from
the wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade
locks into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once
per year for optimum performance.
279
Maintenance
Poor wiper quality can be improved
by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™/3.7L
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle
damage and/or personal burn
injuries do not start your engine with
the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element,
use only the air filter element listed.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 325).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles:
When servicing the air cleaner, it is
important that no foreign material
enter the air induction system. The
engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even
small particles.
Change the air filter element at the
proper interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 440).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the engine
if the correct air filter element is not
used.
2.0L EcoBoost Engine
E144365
3.7L Engine
E146427
1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing
cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from
the air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
filter housing and cover to make
sure no dirt gets in the engine and
to make sure you have a good seal.
280
Maintenance
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air
filter housing and cover. This could
cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if
not properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the
air filter housing cover to the air
filter housing.
ADJUSTING THE
HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident,
the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized
dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to
ground
B
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment
Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of
a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while
adjusting the other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
E142465
281
Maintenance
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a flat zone of high
intensity light located at the top of
the right hand portion of the beam
pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the
horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E150095
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips
#2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster
either clockwise or
counterclockwise in order to adjust
the vertical aim of the headlamp.
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
See an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in
pressure. Condensation can be a
natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp
assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can
occur when the temperature is cold.
When normal condensation occurs, a
thin film of mist can form on the
interior of the lens. The thin mist
eventually clears and exits through
the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation
are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks,
drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of
the lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak)
are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks
or streaks present on the interior
of the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for
service if any of the above conditions
of unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Bulbs
For replacing bulbs, see your
authorized dealer.
282
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION
CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in
the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized
“D.O.T.” for North America to make
sure they have the proper lamp
performance, light brightness, light
pattern, and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp
assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Trade nameFunction
LEDHeadlamp high beam
LEDHeadlamp low beam
LEDSide marker lamp - front
LEDPark lamp - front
LEDTurn lamp - front
LEDTail and brake lamp - high series
LEDTail and brake lamp - low series
LEDReverse lamp
LEDTurn lamp - rear - high series
LEDTurn lamp - rear - low series
LEDSide marker lamp - rear
LEDLicense plate lamp
LEDTrunk lamp
LEDHigh-mount brake lamp
LEDSide repeater lamp
LEDGlove compartment lamp
LEDInterior lamp
To replace any bulb, see your authorized dealer.
283
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer
has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its
finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following
products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft® Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft® Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo
(Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner (Canada
only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool
or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail
Wash.
• Never use strong household
detergents or soap, such as dish
washing or laundry liquid. These
products can discolor and spot
painted surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot
to the touch” or during exposure
to strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or
soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• Immediately remove items such
as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird
droppings and insect deposits
because they can cause damage
to the vehicle’ s paintwork and trim
over time. Use Motorcraft® Bug
and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories,
such as antennas, before entering
a car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect
repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in
contact with your vehicle, wash off as
soon as possible.
284
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials
such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner,
metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool
or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft®
Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft® Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner. Apply the product
as you would a wax to clean
bumpers and other chrome parts;
allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, then wipe off the haze
with a clean, dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to
hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome
surfaces for a period of time
exceeding that which is
recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean
plastic parts
• For routine cleaning, use
Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present,
use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar
Remover.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up
paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a
sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you
get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect
deposits, tar spots, road salt and
industrial fallout before repairing
paint chips.
• Always read the instructions
before using the products.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not
contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come
in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim,
such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings,
mirror housings or the windshield
cowl area. The paint sealant will
“gray” or stain the parts over time.
285
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they
are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than
normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power
washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate
the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft® Engine
Shampoo and Degreaser on all
parts that require cleaning and
pressure rinse clean. In Canada,
use Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine
while it is hot or running; water in
the running engine may cause
internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition
coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around
these locations.
• Cover the battery, power
distribution box, and air filter
assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS
AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should
be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do
not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades
may cause squeaking or chatter noise
from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items, follow these
tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray
Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned
with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield
Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure
to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may
cause scratches
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint
thinner to clean any parts.
286
Vehicle Care
If you cannot remove those streaks
after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a
jerky motion, clean the outer surface
of the windshield and the wiper
blades using a sponge or soft cloth
with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and
wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not
form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such
as a razor blade, to clean the inside of
the rear window or to remove decals,
as it may cause damage to the rear
window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents,
bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may
weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not
use chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system
and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety
belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft® Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft® Spot and Stain
Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraftt Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after
spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not
oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which
can stain and discolor the fabric
and affect the flame retardant
abilities of the seat materials.
CLEANING THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
287
Vehicle Care
Clean the instrument panel and
cluster lens with a clean, damp, white
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry
white cotton cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that
increase the gloss of the upper
portion of the instrument panel.
The dull finish in this area helps
protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your
hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such
as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible
damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass
cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel,
interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and
hand sanitizers to spill onto interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off
immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice
has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces,
clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp,
clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap
and water solution. If the spot
cannot be completely cleaned by
this method, the area may be
cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product
designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and
press the cloth onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it
is not soiled badly, use this cloth
to clean the area by using a
rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with
a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED)
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface
with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface
with a mild soap and water solution.
Dry the area with a soft cloth. In
Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl
Cleaner.
If the leather cannot be completely
cleaned using a mild soap and water
solution, the leather may be cleaned
using a commercially available leather
cleaning product designed for
automotive interiors.
288
Vehicle Care
Note: To check for compatibility, first
test any cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous part of the leather.
You should:
• remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• clean spills and stains as quickly
as possible.
• To check for compatibility, first
test any cleaner or stain remover
on an inconspicuous part of the
leather.
Do not use the following products as
these may damage the leather:
• oil/petroleum-based leather
conditioners.
• household cleaners.
• alcohol solutions.
• solvents or cleaners intended for
rubber, vinyl and plastics.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning
chemical to warm or hot wheel rims
and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes
may cause damage to the finish on
your wheel rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to
remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period
time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric
acid-based or high caustic-based
wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or
strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning
the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive
your vehicle for a few minutes before
doing so. This will reduce the risk of
increased corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are
coated with a clear coat paint finish.
To maintain their condition we
recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly, with the
recommended Ford service wheel
and tire cleaner. Apply using
manufacturer's instructions. Use
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire
Cleaner. See cleaning products
(page ?).
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong
stream of water when you have
completed the cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
See cleaning products (page ?).
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for
an extended period of time (30 days
or more), read the following
maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good
operating condition.
289
Vehicle Care
All motor vehicles and their
components were engineered and
tested for reliable, regular driving.
Long term storage under various
conditions may lead to component
degradation or failure unless specific
precautions are taken to preserve the
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry,
ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud
from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel
housing and underside of front
fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored
in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to
prevent rust
• Cover chrome and stainless steel
parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax
as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk
lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent
fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil
and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be
changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates
that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run
at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality
fuel until the first automatic
shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of
vehicle storage (30 days or more), fuel
may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add
a quality gas stabilizer product to the
vehicle fuel system whenever actual or
expected storage periods exceed 30
days. Follow the instructions on the
additive label. The vehicle should then
be operated at idle speed to circulate
the additive throughout the fuel
system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing
temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling
system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
290
Vehicle Care
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary.
Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more
than 30 days without recharging
the battery, it may be advisable to
disconnect the battery cables to
ensure battery charge is
maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are
disconnected, it will be necessary to
reset memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking
brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air
pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables,
levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent
rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8
meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent
corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From
Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come
out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any
dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any
foreign material that may have
collected during storage
(mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust
build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including
coolant, oil and gas) to make sure
there are no leaks, and fluids are
at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean
the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you
have any concerns or issues.
291
Vehicle Care
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT
(IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The temporary mobility kit
sealant compound in the canister is to
be used for one tire only. See your Ford
authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.
The kit is located in the spare tire well
in the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to reinflate the tire and a
sealing compound in a canister that
will effectively seal most punctures
caused by nails or similar objects. This
kit will provide a temporary seal
allowing you to drive your vehicle up
to 120 miles (200 kilometers) at a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80
km/h).
E144618
Air compressor (inside)A
Diverter knobB
On/off buttonC
Air pressure gaugeD
Sealant bottle and canisterE
Sealant filling clear tubeF
Sealant tube - tire valve
connector
G
Yellow cap toolH
Air compressor hoseI
Air hose -tire valve connectorJ
Accessory power plugK
Casing/housingL
292
Wheels and Tires
General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has
become severely damaged by driving
the vehicle with a tire that has
insufficient air pressure. Only punctured
areas located within the tire tread can
be sealed with the kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures
larger than 1.4 inch (6.4 mm) or
damage to the tire's sidewall. The tire
may not completely seal.
Loss of air pressure may adversely
affect tire performance. For this
reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120
miles (200 km). Drive only to the
closest Ford Motor Company
authorized dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the
tire is losing pressure, have the
vehicle towed.
• Read the information in the Tips
for Use of the Kit section to ensure
safe operation of the kit and your
vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
Read the following list of tips to
ensure safe operation of the kit:
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road
and away from moving traffic. Turn
on the hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to
ensure the vehicle doesn't move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the
tire.
• When using the kit, leave the
engine running (only if the vehicle
is outdoors or in a well-ventilated
area) so the compressor doesn't
drain the vehicle's battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more
than 15 minutes; this will help
prevent the compressor from
overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended
when it is operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex.
Make sure that you use the
non-latex gloves provided to avoid
an allergic reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F
(–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).
293
Wheels and Tires
• Only use the sealing compound
before the use by date. The use by
date is on the lower right hand
corner of the label located on the
sealant canister (bottle). Check
the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four
years.
• Do not store the kit unsecured
inside the passenger compartment
of the vehicle as it may cause injury
during a sudden stop or collision.
Always store the kit in its original
location.
• After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized Ford
dealer.
• When inflating a tire or other
objects, use the black air hose only.
Do not use the transparent hose
which is designed for sealant
application only.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD,
and DVD player operation.
What to do when a Tire Is
Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire's tread
area can be repaired in two stages
with the kit.
• In the first stage, the tire will be
reinflated with a sealing
compound and air. After the tire
has been reinflated, you will need
to drive the vehicle a short
distance (approximately 4 miles
[6 km]) to distribute the sealant
in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need
to check the tire pressure and
adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle's
tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire
with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you
notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire's sidewall
during inflation, stop and call roadside
assistance.
If the tire doesn't inflate to the
recommended tire pressure
within 15 minutes, stop and call
roadside assistance.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe,
level and secure area, away from
moving traffic. Turn the hazard lights
on. Apply the parking brake and turn
the engine off. Inspect the flat tire for
visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To
avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the
accessory box on the underside of the
kit housing.
294
Wheels and Tires
Do not remove any foreign object that
has pierced the tire. If a puncture is
located in the tire sidewall, stop and
call roadside assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten
the metal connector of the tube to
the tire valve, turning clockwise.
Make sure the connection is tightly
fastened.
E144619
4. Plug the power cable into the
12-volt power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found
on the canister and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the
center of the dash.
6. Start the engine only if the vehicle
is outdoors or in a well-ventilated
area.
E144924
7. Push and turn dial (A)
counterclockwise to the sealant
position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on/off button (B).
E144621
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure
listed on the tire label located on
the driver's door or the door jamb
area. When the sealing compound
is first added into the tire, the air
pressure gauge reading on the
compressor unit may indicate a
higher value; this is normal and
should be no reason for concern.
The pressure will drop after about
30 seconds of operation. The tire
pressure has to be checked with
the compressor in the OFF position
to get the correct tire pressure
reading.
295
Wheels and Tires
9. When the recommended tire
pressure is reached, turn off the kit
by pressing the on button;
disconnect the kit from the tire
valve and the power point.
Re-install the valve cap on the tire
valve, place the tube cap on the
metal connector, and return the kit
to the stowage area
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive
the vehicle 4 miles (6 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly
inside the tire. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 km), stop and
check the tire pressure. See
Second stage: Checking tire
pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise
while driving, reduce your speed until
you can safely pull off to the side of the
road to call for roadside assistance.
Note: Do not proceed to the second
stage of this operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the
First stage: Re–inflating the tire
with sealing compound and air section
and have injected sealant in the tire
and the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4
bar), stop and call roadside
assistance. If tire pressure is above 20
psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
The power plug may get hot
after use and should be handled
carefully while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the
side of the compressor and fasten
firmly on the valve stem by turning
clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise
to the air position. Turn on the kit
by pressing the on button.
E144622
4. Adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
from the tire label located on the
driver's door or door jamb area.
The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in
the OFF position to get the correct
tire pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by
pressing the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the
valve cap on the tire and return the
kit to the stowage area.
296
Wheels and Tires
What to do after the Tire has
been Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you
will need to replace the sealant
canister and clear tube (hose).
Sealing compound and spare parts
can be obtained and replaced at an
authorized Ford Motor Company
dealership or tire dealer. Empty
sealant bottles may be disposed of at
home; however, liquid residue from
the sealing compound should be
disposed by your local Ford Motor
Company dealership or tire dealer, or
in accordance with local waste
disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has
been used, the maximum vehicle speed
is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the
maximum driving distance is 120 miles
(200 km). The sealed tire should be
inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any
time within the 120 miles (200 km) by
performing the procedure from
Second stage: Checking tire pressure
listed previously.
Removal of the sealant canister
from the kit
E144623
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
E144624
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end
of the clear tube.
E144625
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press
the tab located on the kit
compressor housing while pulling
up on the sealant canister.
297
Wheels and Tires
Installation of the sealant canister
to the kit
E144626
1. Align the sealant canister with the
kit housing.
E144628
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant
canister by lightly pushing down
until you hear an audible click.
E144628
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties
with the removal or installation of the
sealant canister, consult your Ford
Motor Company authorized dealer for
assistance.
E144629
Be sure to check the sealant
compound's use by date regularly.
The use by date is on the lower right
hand corner of the label located on
the sealant canister (bottle). The
sealant canister should be replaced
after four years.
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring
system is NOT a substitute for
manually checking tire pressure. The
tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in
this chapter. Failure to properly
maintain your tire pressure could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
298
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
299
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located inside the
wheel and tire assembly cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to the valve
stem. The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible unless the
tire is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by an
authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure
readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if
the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s
recommended tire pressure. Even if
the light turns on and a short time
later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit
www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed
When one of your road tires needs to
be replaced with the temporary spare,
the tire pressure monitoring system
will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road
wheel and tire assembly needs to be
repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the
tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly repaired and remounted on
your vehicle.
300
Wheels and Tires
When you Believe your System is
not Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also
warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as
intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your
tire pressure monitoring system:
301
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter. 2. After inflating your
tires to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/
h) before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning
light
Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire assembly and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system function-
ality. For a description on how the
system functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire assembly and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system function-
ality. For a description on how the
system functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
302
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such
as at a gas station or in your garage),
the tire pressure monitoring system
may not respond immediately to the
air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled
your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects your
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a
normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase
approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly
lower than the daytime temperature,
the tire pressure may decrease
approximately 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop
of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the TPMS
as being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the TPMS warning light for
low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is
flat. (If one or more tires are flat, repair
as necessary.) Check air pressure in
the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
303
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Important information for
245/40R19 low-profile tires and
wheels If your vehicle is equipped
with 245/40R19 tires, they are
low-profile tires. These tires and
wheels are designed to give your
vehicle a sport appearance. With
low-profile tires, you may notice an
increase in road noise and faster tire
wear, depending on road conditions
and driving styles. Due to their design,
low-profile tires and wheels are more
prone to road damage from potholes,
rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails
and curb contact than standard tires
and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’ s warranty does not
cover these types of damage. Tires
should always be kept at the correct
inflation pressures and extra caution
should be taken when operating on
rough roads to avoid impacts that
could cause wheel and tire damage.
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They
do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, light
truck or LT type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation
Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation
requires Ford Motor Company to give
you the following information about
tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
304
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
139. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
305
Wheels and Tires
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE
(Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
• Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of
the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at 35 psi
[37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi
[43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the
tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts
the road when mounted on the
vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
306
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes
the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed rating.
The definitions of these items are
listed below. (Note that the tire size,
load index and speed rating for your
vehicle may be different from this
example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA),
that may be used for service on cars,
SUVs, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated
by either ETRTO (European Tire and
Rim Technical Organization) or
JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In general, the
larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index.
It is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find
this information in your owner’s
manual. If not, contact a local tire
dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
307
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed
at which a tire is designed to be driven
for extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and
inflation pressure. The tires on your
vehicle may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from
81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299
km/h). These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Speed rating - mph
(km/h)
Letter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed rating - mph
(km/h)
Letter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h),
tire manufacturers sometimes use the
letters ZR. For those with a maximum
speed capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always use
the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire
meets all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the plant
code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to
four digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The numbers
in between are identification codes
used for traceability. This information
is used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
308
Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the number
of plies or the number of layers of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also
must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
• Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
• Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
309
Wheels and Tires
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer's recommended
cold inflation pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on
the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained
on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are described
below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA),
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at
psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when
the tire is used as a dual; defined as
four tires on the rear axle (a total of
six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at
psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when
the tire is used as a single; defined as
two tires (total) on the rear axle.
310
Wheels and Tires
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are described
below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is intended
for temporary service on cars, SUVs,
minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In general, the
larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing
tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure without
appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
311
Wheels and Tires
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the
tire pressure with a tire gauge
(including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure
recommended by Ford Motor
Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges may
be inaccurate. Ford recommends the
use of a digital or dial-type tire
pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to
follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the
tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the pressure
at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
312
Wheels and Tires
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature
drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures frequently
and adjust them to the proper
pressure which can be found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot
tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance
to get air for your tire(s), check and
record the tire pressure first and add
the appropriate air pressure when you
get to the pump. It is normal for tires
to heat up and the air pressure inside
to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires (refer
to the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description): Store and maintain at 60
psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires (refer to the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description): Store and maintain at the
higher of the front and rear inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
313
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve
stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that
may permit air leakage and repair or
replace the tire and replace the valve
stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted
and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs
of excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to blow
out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the
tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm)
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges
in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the
tread or sidewall). If damage is
observed or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional. Tires
can be damaged during off-road use,
so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
314
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires
experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes
the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to
four digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The numbers
in between are identification codes
used for traceability. This information
is used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
315
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you have
questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
When mounting replacement
tires and wheels, you should not
exceed the maximum pressure
indicated on the sidewall of the tire to
set the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the beads
do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure
on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect
the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
WARNINGS
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should
do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with
a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12
ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and
tire assembly
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used
in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the operation of
your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your
TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your TPMS, or
some component of the TPMS may
be damaged.
316
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can
tear the tire and cause an explosion.
A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or
bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the
road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’ s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest
safe area out of traffic. This may
further damage the flat tire, but your
safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been
damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can
safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate
it, remove wheel and replace it with
your spare tire and wheel. If you
cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the
vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end of
your vehicle to become misaligned or
cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when
you’re driving, the wheels may be out
of alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or
the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension
(if equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
317
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels. If you
have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as indicated
in the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel drive
vehicles (front tires on the left side of
the diagram)
E142547
All vehicles with directional tires (front
tires on the left of the diagram)
E147237
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Summer Tires
Your Ford vehicle may be equipped
with summer tires to provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud
and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction
rating on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as All-season
or Snow tires, Ford does not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately
40°F (5°C) or below (depending on
tire wear and environmental
conditions) or in snow and ice
conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you
must drive in those conditions, Ford
recommends using Mud and Snow
(M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
318
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
Snow chains have not been approved
for use on your vehicle.
WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires
on your vehicle, they must be the
same size, construction, and load
range as the original tires listed on the
tire placard, and they must be
installed on all four wheels. Mixing
tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect
your vehicle's handling and braking,
and may lead to loss of vehicle
control.
Do not use snow chains or cables
on this vehicle as they may cause
damage to your vehicle which may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
The original equipment tires on your
vehicle may have an all-weather tread
design to provide traction, handling,
and braking performance in
year-round driving. You may install
snow tires for improved traction when
driving in areas with sustained periods
of snow or icy driving conditions.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealants may
damage your tire pressure
monitoring system and should not be
used. However, if you must use a
sealant, the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor and valve stem on the
wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 298). for
important information. If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring
system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore
the full function of the monitoring
system, all road wheels equipped with
tire pressure monitoring sensors must
be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do
not apply the brake heavily. Instead,
gradually decrease your speed. Hold
the steering wheel firmly and slowly
move to a safe place on the side of
the road.
319
Wheels and Tires
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to
the tire pressure monitoring system
sensors. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 298).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire
as soon as possible. During repairing
or replacing of the flat tire, have the
authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor
for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and
Tire Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel
and tire, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that
if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is
the same size and type as the road
tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar
spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare wheel
and tire assembly that is different in
brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels and can be one
of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size
and may have Temporary Use Only
molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with
label on wheel: This spare tire has a
label on the wheel that states: THIS
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the
dissimilar spare tires listed above, do
not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
tire at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare
tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location
can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at
curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
320
Wheels and Tires
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare
without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at
curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
• Load leveling adjustment (if
applicable).
When driving with the full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly additional caution should
be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly and seek service as soon as
possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is
off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if
the transmission selector lever is in
position P.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire,
be sure to place the transmission
selector lever in position P, set the
parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously
injured.
321
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to change a tire
on the side of the vehicle close
to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being
hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the
one provided as original equipment
with your vehicle, make sure the jack
capacity is adequate for the vehicle
weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
1. Park on a level surface, set the
parking brake and activate the
hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission selector
lever in position P and turn the
engine off.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
4. Remove the spare tire bolt
securing the spare tire by turning
it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the spare tire from the
spare tire compartment.
E142550
6. Remove the lug wrench and jack
from the foam holder.
E142551
7. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the
wheel is raised off the ground.
9. The vehicle jacking points are
shown here, and are depicted on
the yellow warning label on the
jack. Jack at the specified
locations to avoid damage to
the vehicle.
E145908
10. Small arrow-shaped marks on
the sills show the location of the
jacking points.
322
Wheels and Tires
E142553
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall
the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the
wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown.
See Technical Specifications
(page 324).
Stowing the flat tire
The full-size road wheel can be
stowed in the spare tire compartment.
1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an
angle to access the spare tire
compartment.
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire
well with the valve stem facing
down to allow the mini-spare bolt
to secure the wheel.
3. Place the jack and foam block
back into the spare tire
compartment.
E146026
323
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface
of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure
that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not
interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without
correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only
Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers)
after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
324
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.7L V6 Engine2.0L EcoBoost engineEngine
227122Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
10.5:19.3:1Compression ratio
0.049-0.053 in. (1.25-1.35
mm)
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80
mm)
Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
3.7L Engine
E146428
2.0L EcoBoost Engine
A
B
E142480
Long drivebelt is on first
pulley groove closest to
engine
A
Short drivebelt is on second
pulley groove farthest from
engine
B
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
3.7L V6 Engine2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent
FA-1912
Air filter element
1
FL-500-SFL-910S
Oil filter
2
BXT-65-650BXT-96R-500Battery
325
Capacities and Specifications
3.7L V6 Engine2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent
BXT-96R-590
SP-520SP-527
Spark plugs
3
FP-71Cabin air filter
FS-104Seat filter
WW-2700 (driver side)Windshield wiper
blade WW-2601 (passenger side)
1
Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage.
The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct
air filter element is not used.
2
Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil
filter can result in engine damage.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the spark
plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design
specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement
parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such
spark plugs are not used.
326
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX
is representative of your vehicle
identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number
contains the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer
identifier
A
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint
Devices and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series,
body type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence
number
H
327
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E142478
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the driver's
seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E142806
The transmission code is on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table shows the
transmission code along with the
transmission description.
CodeDescription
ASix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
WSix-speed automatic transmission 6F35
328
Capacities and Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ford Part Number
/ Ford Specifica-
tion
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
PM-1-C / WSS-
M6C65-A2 and
ISO 4925 Class 6
Motorcraft® DOT
4 LV High
Performance
Brake Fluid
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Brake fluid
1
XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent / ESB-
M1C93-B
Multi-Purpose
Grease (lithium
grease)
Not applicableDoor latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, trunk latch,
seat tracks.
XL-1 / NoneMotorcraft®
Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant
Not applicableLock cylinder
XT-10-QLV
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft®
MERCON® LV
ATF
9.0 qt (8.5 L)6F35 automatic
transmission fluid
2, 3
11.6 qt (11 L)6F50 automatic
transmission fluid
2, 3
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE
80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle
Lubricant
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-140
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
12fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)
4
WSS-M2C946-AMotorcraft® SAE
5W-30 or equi-
valent motor oil
5.7 qt (5.4 L)2.0L EcoBoost engine
oil
5, 6
WSS-M2C945-AMotorcraft® SAE
5W-20 or equi-
valent motor oil
6 qt (5.7 L)
3.7L V6 engine oil
5, 6
329
Capacities and Specifications
Ford Part Number
/ Ford Specifica-
tion
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
- VC-3DIL-B (U.S.)Motorcraft®
Orange Anti-
freeze/Coolant
Prediluted
9.7 qt (9.2 L)2.0L EcoBoost engine
coolant
7
- CVC-3DIL-B
(Canada)
/ WSS-M97B44-
D2
11.7 qt (11.1 L)3.7L V6 engine
coolant
7
- ZC-32-A (U.S.)- Motorcraft®
Premium Wind-
shield Washer
Concentrate
(U.S.)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer
fluid - CXC-37-(A, B, D,
and F) (Canada)
/ WSB-M8B16-A2/
--
Premium Quality
Windshield
Washer Fluid
(Canada)
Not applicableNot applicable16.5 gal
(62.5 L)
2.0L EcoBoost engine
front-wheel drive fuel
tank
330
Capacities and Specifications
Ford Part Number
/ Ford Specifica-
tion
Ford Part Name or
Equivalent
CapacityItem
17.5 gal
(66.2 L)
2.0L EcoBoost engine
all-wheel drive fuel
tank
17.5 gal
(66.2 L)
3.7L V6 engine front-
wheel drive or all-
wheel drive fuel tank
1
Use only Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent
meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 and ISO 4925 Class 6. Use of any fluid other than
the recommended fluid may cause brake system damage.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
3
Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission
fluid should only use Motorcraft® MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission
damage.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 440).
4
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
5
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil must
meet or exceed the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A, SAE
5W-30 (2.0L engine) or WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 (3.7L engine) and display
the API Starburst Certification Mark.
6
If the Ford specification is not shown on the oil container, the oil container must
display the API Starburst Certification Mark and the correct viscosity.
7
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
331
Capacities and Specifications
For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or
visit our online store at:
Accessories.Lincoln.com (U.S.
only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are
available for your vehicle through your
local Lincoln or Lincoln of Canada
dealer. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly
dealer-installed Lincoln Custom
Accessories found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty
period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be
warranted for whichever provides you
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000
kilometers) (whichever occurs
first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a
copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Hood deflectors
• Side-window deflectors
• Wheels
• Bumper protectors
Interior style
• All-weather floor mats
• Rear seat entertainment*
• Premium carpeted floor mats
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages)
• Cargo area protector
• Cargo net
• Cargo organizer
• Roof racks and carriers*
Peace of mind
• Car cover*
• Wheel locks
• Bumper mounted parking sensor*
• Locking fuel plug for capless fuel
system
*Lincoln Licensed Accessories are
warranted by the accessory
manufacturer's warranty. Lincoln
Licensed Accessories are fully
designed and developed by the
accessory manufacturer and have not
been designed or tested to Ford Motor
Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Lincoln dealer for details
regarding the manufacturer's limited
warranty and a copy of the Lincoln
Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty offered by the accessory
manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance,
keep the following information in mind
when adding accessories or
equipment to your vehicle:
332
Accessories
• When adding accessories,
equipment, passengers and
luggage to your vehicle, do not
exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear
axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated
on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Consult your
authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the
use of mobile communications
systems — such as two-way
radios, telephones and theft
alarms - that are equipped with
radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed
only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems
may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not
properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other
vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio
users who install radios and
antennas onto their vehicle should
not locate the amateur radio
antennas in the area of the driver's
side hood.
• Any non-Lincoln custom electrical
or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the
vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner, may adversely affect
battery performance and
durability, and may also adversely
affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
333
Accessories
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln
owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Ford Extended Service
Plan. It is the only extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company,
and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended
Service Plans with different levels of
coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
1. PremiumCare - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With
over 500 covered components,
this plan is so complete that we
generally only discuss what’s not
covered!
2. ExtraCare - Covers 113
components, and includes many
high-tech items.
3. BaseCare - Covers 84
components.
4. PowertrainCare - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored
by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the
U.S. and Canada. It is the only
extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That
means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere
you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with
every covered repair.
Rental Car Reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for
covered repairs, you are eligible for
rental car coverage, including
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty repairs,
or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your
Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any
remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you’re ready to sell your car,
prospective buyers may feel better
about taking a risk on your used
vehicle. Ford Extended Service Plan
may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside
assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and
battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out
assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi,
shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
334
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Ford Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of
your Ford Extended Service Plan
Service Contract. With a Ford Extend
Service Plan, you minimize your risk
for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan
that covers items that routinely wear
out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never
have to worry about affording your
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular
checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of
items that require periodic attention
for normal wear:
• Wiper blades
• Spark plugs (except California)
• Clutch disc
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock absorbers
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln
dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service
Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and
budget.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our installment
payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an
affordable no interest, no-fee
payment opportunity.
For More Information
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE
RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE
PLAN.
To learn more, call our Ford ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377, and
don't forget to ask about our interest
free payment program, allowing you
all the security and benefits Ford ESP
has to offer while paying over time.
your pre-approved with no credit
checks, no hassles!
Or, complete the information below
and mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
Name (PLEASE PRINT)
APT.#ADDRESS
335
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Name (PLEASE PRINT)
ZIPSTATECITY
E-MAIL
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA
ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service
Plan is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford Extended
Service Plan provides benefits such
as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance
and wear items
• Protection against repair costs
after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended
Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible
combinations. Each plan is tailored to
fit your own driving needs, including
reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating
Ford Motor Company dealers. The
Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan
is honored at authorized Lincoln
dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada and the United States are not
eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local
Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca
to find the Ford Extended Service Plan
that is right for you.
336
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take their focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features are not available
while the vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 30 minutes
after the ignition has been turned off
(as long as no doors are opened).
This system uses a four-corner
strategy to provide quick access to
vehicle features and settings. The
comprehensive touchscreen provides
easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control
and navigation system. The corners
display any active modes within those
menus, such as your phone being
connected or the climate
temperature.
E142607
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
• Clock
• Display
• Sound
• Vehicle
• Settings
• Help
E142608
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• Services
• Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• Apps
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Phone
• Quick Dial
• Phonebook
• History
• Messaging
• Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest
• Emergency
• Previous Starting Point
• Latitude/Longitude
337
MyLincoln Touch™
• Street Address
• Intersection
• City Center
• Map
• Edit Route Cancel Route
• Freeway Entrance/Exit
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM
• FM
• SIRIUS
• CD
• USB
• BT Stereo
• SD Card
• A/V In
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost
E142613
HOME
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the
screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited
depending on your market. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
Using the Touch-Sensitive
Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch
the graphic with your finger. To get the
best performance from the
touch-sensitive controls:
• Make sure your hands are clean
and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates
based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are
wearing gloves.
• Use your bare finger to touch the
center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic
may cause a nearby control to turn
on or off.
• Do not press hard on the controls.
They are sensitive to light touch.
• Metal and other conductive
material should be kept away from
the surface of the touchscreen as
this may cause electronic
interference (i.e. control
activation).
338
MyLincoln Touch™
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
• Power: Turn the media (or climate
features) on or off.
• VOL: Increase or decrease the
volume.
• Fan: Increase or decrease the fan
speed.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you
normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD.
• SOURCE: Touch the word
repeatedly to see all available
media modes. The screen does not
change, but you see the media
change in the lower left status bar.
• SOUND: Touch the word to access
the Sound menu where you can
make adjustments to settings such
as: Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance
and Fade, THX Deep Note Demo
(if equipped), DSP (if equipped),
Occupancy Mode (if equipped)
and Speed Compensated Volume.
• Hazard flasher: Press the button
to turn the hazard flashers on or
off.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
Display
Clean the display with a clean, soft
cloth such as one used for cleaning
glasses. If dirt or finger prints are still
visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or
spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent
to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available
to help you with any questions you are
not able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm.
In the United States, call:
1-888-270-1055
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner
account?
• Required to activate Vehicle
Health Report and to view the
reports online.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services
and to personalize your Saved
Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the
latest software downloads
available for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for
any questions you may have.
339
MyLincoln Touch™
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take their focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if
the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Carefully
place cords and cables where they
cannot be stepped on or interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving
abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in the
vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage.
See your device's user guide for
further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair
the system. See your authorized
dealer.
• For your safety, some SYNC
functions are speed-dependent
and cannot be performed when
the vehicle is traveling at speeds
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your
device's user guide before using it with
SYNC.
Speed-Restricted Features
Some features of this system may be
too difficult to use while the vehicle is
in motion so they are restricted from
being modified unless the vehicle is
not moving. Some examples of these
are listed below:
• Screens that are too crowded with
information, such as Point of
Interest (POI) reviews and ratings,
SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores,
movie times, ski conditions, etc.
• Any action that requires using a
keyboard, such as entering a
navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can
view fewer entries (e.g., phone
contacts, recent phone call
entries).
Listed below are more specific
features that can only be modified
while the vehicle is not moving:
340
MyLincoln Touch™
Restricted Features
Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phone-
book contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and
recent phone call entries
Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active
park assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing videoVideos, Photos and
Graphics
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wall-
paper
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid
Areas
341
MyLincoln Touch™
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected
to SYNC, the system creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to
that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more
cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this
profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a
media device, the system creates and
retains an index of supported media
content. The system also records a
short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and
other system data may be used to
improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may
occur.
The cellular profile, media device
index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them
and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or
the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
System data cannot be accessed
without special equipment and access
to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford
Motor Company and Ford of Canada
do not access the system data for any
purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist® (if equipped), Vehicle Health
Report (if equipped), and Traffic,
Directions and Information (if
equipped).
342
MyLincoln Touch™
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Vehicle Information
Display
E156609
The display is located on the center
of your instrument cluster (A). It
allows you to view and make minor
adjustments to active modes without
taking your hands off the wheel. For
example:
• In entertainment mode, you can
view what is now playing, change
the audio source, select presets
and make some adjustments.
• In phone mode, you can accept or
reject an incoming call.
• In navigation mode (if equipped),
you can view the current route or
activate a route.
• In climate mode, the driver side
temperature can bet set as well as
fan speed.
E145982
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the
right side of your steering wheel to
scroll through the available modes:
E142611
Entertainment
E142609
Phone
E142610
Navigation
E142612
Climate Control
343
MyLincoln Touch™
You can make selections from the
menu by using the OK button. The
selection menu expands and you are
allowed different options.
• Press the up and down arrows to
scroll through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the
mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to
make adjustments within the
chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped
with Navigation, Compass appears in
the display instead of Navigation. If you
press the right arrow to go into the
Compass menu, you can see the
compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the
vehicle is traveling, not true direction
(i.e., if the vehicle is traveling west, the
middle of the compass graphic displays
west; north displays to the left of west
though its true direction is to the right
of west).
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of
you. The system provides feedback
through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the
chosen level of interaction (voice
settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not
sure of your request or when there are
multiple possible responses to your
request.
When using voice commands, words
and icons may also appear in the
lower left status bar indicating the
status of the voice session (i.e.,
listening, success, failed, paused or
try again).
How to Use Voice Commands with
Your System
E142599
Press the voice icon; after the
tone, speak your command
clearly.
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice
commands for the current session, do
one of the following:
• During a voice session, press the
help icon (?) in the lower left
status bar of the screen.
• Say "What can I say?" for an
on-screen listing of the possible
voice commands associated with
your current voice session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone,
say "Help" for an audible list of
possible voice commands.
344
MyLincoln Touch™
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the
vehicle is as quiet as possible.
Wind noise from open windows
and road vibrations may prevent
the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with
the system.
• Speak naturally, without long
pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Basic commands
If You Want ToSay
Make calls."Phone"
Access the device connected to your USB port."USB"
Stream audio from your phone."Bluetooth audio"
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input
jack.
"Line in"
Cancel the requested action."Cancel"
Return to the main menu."SYNC"
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback."Voice settings"
Run a vehicle health report.
*
"Vehicle health report"
Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
"Services"
Access mobile applications.
*
"Mobile apps"
Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
"Help"
*
If equipped, U.S. only
345
MyLincoln Touch™
These commands can be said at any time during a voice session
"Main menu"
"List of commands"
"What can I say?"
"Next page"
"Previous page"
"Go back"
"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Help"
Accessing a List of Available
Commands
1. Using the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon, Help, then Voice
Command List.
2. Using the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone,
speak your command clearly.
Available Voice Commands
"Radio list of commands""Audio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands""Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Sirius satellite list of commands"
*
"Browse list of commands"
"Travel link list of commands"
*
"CD list of commands"
"USB list of commands""Climate control list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands""List of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Navigation list of commands"
*
"Help""Phone list of commands"
*
If equipped
346
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize
the level of system interaction, help
and feedback. The system defaults
to standard interaction which uses
candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
• Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides more detailed interaction
and guidance while the advanced
mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
• Confirmation Prompts: These
are short questions the system
asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and you may still
occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
• Phone and Media Candidate
Lists: Candidate lists are lists of
possible results from your voice
commands. The system creates
these lists when it has the same
confidence level of several options
based on your voice command.
To access these settings using the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Settings icon, Settings,
then Voice Control.
2. Select from the following:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon; after the tone
sounds, the system says "Please
say a command". Another tone
sounds to let you know the system
is listening.
2. Say any of the following
commands:
Voice Settings Using Voice Commands
"Interaction mode novice"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Confirmation prompts off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
347
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Settings Using Voice Commands
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
"Media candidate lists off"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode
feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
most often available when using
navigation.
On-screen buttons are outlined in blue
to indicate the selections that are part
of the dual mode feature. For
example, if while you are in a voice
session rather than saying the
command "Enter street name" to
change the field, you can press Street
and the voice session does not end.
Instead, the voice system changes to
the Street field and asks you to say
the street name. The buttons not
outlined in blue cannot be used as
voice commands; if they are touched
during a voice session, the voice
session is canceled.
For example, you can choose from the
following on the Navigation home
screen:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest (POI)
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• Cancel Route.
Some of the voice commands that
are available while viewing this screen
are:
Destination
"Destination my home"
"Destination street address"
"Destination favorites"
348
MyLincoln Touch™
Destination
"Destination previous destinations"
"Destination POI"
"Destination intersection"
"Destination emergency"
If you choose Street Address from the
navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• Number
• City
• Street Name
• State/Prov.
Some of the voice commands that
are available while viewing this screen
are:
Street Address
"Enter house number"
"Change house number"
"Enter street name"
"Change street name"
"Enter city"
"Change city"
"Enter state"
"Change state"
If you choose Points of Interest from
the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• Search Area
• Search By Name
• Fuel Station
• ATM
• All Restaurants
• Accommodations
• Parking.
Some of the voice commands that
are available while viewing this screen
are:
349
MyLincoln Touch™
Points of Interest or POI
"Destination <POI category name>"
"Search by name"
"Search by category"
"Change search area"
"Change state"
Note: These are just a sample of the
voice commands available within the
Points of Interest section; the
categories themselves are also
technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the
navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• 1st Street
• 2nd Street
• City
• State/Prov.
Some of the voice commands that
are available while viewing this screen
are:
Intersection
"Enter first street name"
"Change first street name"
"Enter second street name"
"Change second street name"
"Enter city"
"Change city"
"Enter state"
"Change state"
350
MyLincoln Touch™
The dual mode feature is also
available when the voice system
displays a list of items to pick from
during a voice session, where you
would be able to touch the line item
or say "Line 2". If a command is not
understood or there are multiple
options, the system returns a list for
you to choose from.
SETTINGS
Under the menu setting, you can set
your clock, access and make
adjustments to the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access
settings for specific modes or the help
feature.
Clock
Note: The date is set by your vehicle's
GPS; you cannot manually set the date.
Note: If the battery has been
disconnected, the vehicle needs to
acquire a GPS signal to update the
clock. Once your vehicle acquires the
signal, it may take a few minutes for
the update to display the correct time.
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make
other adjustments such as 12-hour or
24-hour mode, activate GPS time
synchronization and have the system
automatically update new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air
temperature display on and off. When
the outside air temperature is
displayed, it appears at the top center
of the touchscreen next to the time
and date.
Once you update any settings, they
are automatically saved.
Display
You can make adjustments to the
touchscreen display through the
touchscreen or by pressing the voice
button on your steering wheel controls
and when prompted, say "Display
settings".
To access and make adjustments
using the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon > Display.
• Brightness allows you to make
the screen display brighter or
dimmer.
• Mode allows you to set the screen
to a certain brightness or have the
system automatically change
based on the outside light level.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT,
you have the options of turning
the display's Auto Dim feature
on or off and changing the Auto
Dim Manual Offset feature.
• Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or
upload your own.
351
MyLincoln Touch™
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly
from your camera. You must access
the photos from either your USB mass
storage device or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely
large dimensions (i.e., 2048 x 1536)
may not be compatible and appear as
a blank (black) image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and
view up to 32 photos.
To access, press the Settings icon >
Display > Edit Wallpaper, then follow
the system prompts to upload your
photographs.
Only the photograph(s) which meets
the following conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as
follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800
x 384
Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then
select from the following:
Sound Settings
THX Deep Note Demo
*
Bass
DSP
*
Midrange
Occupancy Mode
*
Treble
Speed Compensated VolumeSet Balance and Fade
*
If equipped.
Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle to
access settings for:
• Active Park Assist
• Ambient Lighting
• Vehicle Health Report
• Door Keypad Code
• Rear View Camera
• Enable Valet Mode.
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
When activated, your system displays
directions for you regarding the active
park assist process. See Active Park
Assist (page 186).
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting
illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and
make adjustments:
352
MyLincoln Touch™
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or
decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the
power button.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped)
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off
and set the mileage interval at which
you would like to receive the reports.
Press the ? for more information on
these selections.
When done making your selections,
press Run Vehicle Health Report Now
if you want your report.
Door Keypad Code (If Equipped)
To change the keypad code for your
keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code,
then, when prompted, enter your
new code.
Rear View Camera (If Equipped)
This menu allows you to access
settings for your rear view camera.
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Rear View Camera, then select from
the following settings:
• Rear Camera Delay
• Visual Park Aid Alert
• Guidelines.
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If you are locked out and need
to reset the PIN, you can enter 3681
and the system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the
system so that none of your
information on the system can be
accessed until it is unlocked with the
correct PIN.
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Enable Valet Mode.
2. When prompted, enter a four-digit
PIN.
After you press Continue the system
is locked until the correct PIN is
entered again.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings,
voice features, as well as phone,
navigation and wireless settings.
Some of these settings can also be
accessed with regard to their specific
modes (i.e., phone and media).
System
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
System, then select from the
following:
353
MyLincoln Touch™
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the
system.
System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm button
choices made through the climate or audio system.
Touch Panel Button
Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY
or ABC format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the
current software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
Master Reset
Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Voice Control, then select from the
following:
Voice Control
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed
interaction and guidance. Advanced mode has less
audible interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has
not clearly heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
354
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Control
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off,
you may be asked to confirm settings occasionally.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. If these are turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess at your request.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. If these are turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess at your request.
Phone Candidate Lists
Allows you to adjust the voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Media Player, then select from the
following:
355
MyLincoln Touch™
Media Player
With this feature on, the system automatically
switches to the media source upon initial connection
and you can listen to music which has already been
randomly indexed during the indexing process. With
this feature off, the system does not automatically
switch to the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a
device. You can also set a device as your favorite so
that the system automatically attempts to connect
to that device at every ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
Allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database
Info
With this feature on, metadata information is pulled
from the Gracenote Database for your music files.
This overrides information from your device. This
feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Mgmt
With this feature on, cover art is pulled from the
Gracenote Database for your music files. This over-
rides any art from your device. This feature defaults
to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Navigation, then select from the
following:
Navigation
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom
or bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
356
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation
Have the system display the shortest route, fastest
route or most ecological route.
Route Preferences
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle)
lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system display areas where road work
occurs.
Traffic Preferences
Have the system display incident map icons on the
map.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas with snow and ice
on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be
reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on
planned navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
357
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Phone, then select from the following:
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well
as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not
ring inside the vehicle. With this feature turned on,
text message notifications are also suppressed and
do not ring inside the vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn 911 Assist on and off. See Information (page
392).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring
tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages -
alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If compatible with your phone, you can make
adjustments to your internet data connection.
Select to make your connection profile with the PAN
(personal area network) or to turn off your connec-
tion. You can also choose to make adjustments to
your settings or have the system always connect,
never connect when roaming or query on connect.
Press ? for additional information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
358
MyLincoln Touch™
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature which
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(i.e., personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files, play games, etc. Using this
Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle
can also gain access the internet if you
have a USB mobile broadband
connection inside the vehicle, your
phone supports PAN (personal area
networking) and if you are parked
outside of a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings >
Wireless & Internet, then select from
the following:
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode Turn the Wi-Fi
feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure it is
turned on for connectivity purposes.
Wi-Fi Settings
Choose a Wireless Network Use a previously
stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You
can also choose to search for a network, connect
to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a
network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode Make SYNC an
access point for a phone or a computer by turning
this feature on. This forms the local area network
within the vehicle for things, such as game playing,
file transfer, internet browsing, etc. Press ? for more
information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings View and
change settings for using SYNC as the internet
gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List View who
has connected to your Wi-Fi connection recently.
359
MyLincoln Touch™
Wi-Fi
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a
USB mobile broadband connection to access the
internet. (You must activate your mobile broadband
device on your PC prior to connecting it to the
system.) This screen allows you to set up what is
your typical area for your USB mobile broadband
connection. (USB mobile broadband settings may
not be displayed if the device is already activated.)
You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone
Number, User Name and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you what device is currently paired with the
system as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth
options to connect, disconnect, set as favorite,
delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them
as needed. You can select to Change Order and
have the system either always attempt to connect
using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
E142626
The
Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then
select from the following:
Help
View the vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is
equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not
equipped with navigation, nothing is displayed.
Where Am I?
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
360
MyLincoln Touch™
Help
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version (if applicable)
Map database version (if equipped with navigation)
Sirius satellite radio ESN (if activated)
Gracenote® Database Information and Library
version
View the licenses for any software and applications
installed on your system.
Software Licenses
Certain features are disabled when your vehicle is
moving.
Driving Restrictions
Turn 911 Assist on and off. See Information (page
392).
911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: This
feature allows you to save up to two numbers as
ICE contacts for quick access in the event of an
emergency. Select Edit to access your phonebook
and then select the desired contacts. The numbers
then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1
and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select are
presented to you at the completion of the 911 Assist
call process for quick access.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
To access Help using the voice
commands, press the voice button,
then, after the tone, say "Help". The
system provides voice commands
that can be used in the current mode.
ENTERTAINMENT
Your system offers many media
options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice
commands.
361
MyLincoln Touch™
Browsing Device Content
When listening to any type of audio,
you can browse through other devices
without having to change sources. For
example, if you are currently listening
to the radio, you can browse all the
artists that are stored on your USB
device.
E142599
Press the voice icon on the
steering wheel. When
prompted, you can say:
"BROWSE" within Devices
"Browse"
*
"Browse <league> games"
**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels"
**
"Browse CD track list"
"Browse SD card"
"Browse Sirius channel guide"
**
"Browse USB"
"Help"
*
If you only say "Browse", you can then say any commands in the following
chart.
**
If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.
"BROWSE"
"<League> Games"
*
"<Sirius category> channels"
*
"CD Track List"
"SD card"
*
362
MyLincoln Touch™
"BROWSE"
"Sirius Channel Guide"
*
"USB"
**
"Help"
*
If equipped with SIRIUS® satellite radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the "SD Card and USB
Port" section of this chapter.
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen and then
select the AM or FM tabs.
To change between AM and FM
presets, just touch the AM or FM tabs.
You CanWhen You Select
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the
memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while
the station is being saved, then sound returns when
it is done.
Presets
Turn the feature on. This enables you to receive
radio broadcasts digitally (where available),
providing free, crystal-clear sound.
HD Radio
Go to the next strong AM or FM radio station.Scan
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Balance and Fade, THX Deep Note
Demo (if equipped), DSP (if equipped), Occupancy
Mode (if equipped) and Speed Compensated
Volume.
Options
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a
category of music you would like to search for and
then choose to either seek or scan for the stations.
363
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
RDS Text Display allows you to always view the
information broadcast by FM stations by selecting
On.
Auto Presets (AST) allows you to have the system
automatically store the six strongest stations in your
current location.
TAG Button (if available) allows you to tag a song
to download later. When you select On, TAG
appears on-screen when HD Radio is active. You
can press TAG to save the information of the song
that is playing. When you plug in your portable music
player, the information is transferred (if supported
by your device). When you are connected to
iTunes®, the tags appear to remind you of the songs
you would like to download.
Enter the desired station number when prompted.
Press Enter.
Direct Tune
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the
analog broadcasts it already receives.
Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts
with free, crystal-clear audio and no
static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available
stations and programming, please
visit www.hdradio.com.
When this feature is enabled and you
are tuned to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology, you may notice
the following indicators on your
screen:
E142616
The HD Radio logo blinks when a
digital station is being acquired and is
solid when digital audio is playing.
When this logo is available, you may
also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen .
364
MyLincoln Touch™
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital
broadcasts. The numbers that are
highlighted signify available digital
channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the
main programming status and is
available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Any additional multicast
stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
broadcast digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later. When you are on an
acquired HD Radio station, the TAG
button is available (provided the
feature has been turned on). To use
the tag feature:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
Button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like,
touch TAG.
3. The system automatically saves
the song's information and
transfers it to your portable music
player (if supported) when it is
connected to the system. If your
music player is connected at the
time, the system automatically
transfers the tag to your player and
a pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes® with
your portable music player, the
tags appear to you as a reminder.
The system allows you to tag up
to approximately 100 songs. For a
list of devices that support tagging,
refer to www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active,
you can access the following
functions:
You CanWhen You Select
Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.Scan
This feature still works when HD Radio reception is
activated, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7
channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the
station has a digital broadcast.
When the channel is active on-screen, press and
hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute, then the sound returns signi-
fying it was saved. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the digital
audio is played as the system must once again
acquire the digital signal. As with any saved radio
station, you cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station's reception area.
To save a multicast
station as a preset
365
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you
are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back
to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast
is available again. However, if you are listening to
any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels,
the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able
to connect to the digital signal again.
Reception area
When a station is first received (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), the system first plays the
station in the analog version and then, if the receiver
verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. This shift
from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog, is known as blending.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues
found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Every station is
independently owned and operated.
These stations are responsible for
ensuring all audio streams and data
fields are accurate.
366
MyLincoln Touch™
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
None. Broadcast issue.Poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio. Increase
or decrease in audio
volume.
None. Reception issue
that may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
Sound fading or blending
in and out.
None. This is normal
behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is
not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once decoded,
the audio is available.
Audio mute delay when
selecting HD2/HD3,
multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
None. The station is not
available in your current
location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in
your current reception
area.
Cannot access HD2/HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from
a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
No text information
shown for currently
selected frequency.
None. This is normal
behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
367
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD
Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company and
iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using
HD Radio technology. Content may
be changed, added or deleted at any
time at the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the
radio, press the voice button
on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of
the following commands.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "Radio", then any of the
following commands.
"RADIO"
"FM autoset preset <#>""<87.9-107.9>"
"FM preset <#>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"
1
"FM 1""<530-1710>"
"FM 1 preset <#>""AM"
"FM 2""AM <530-1710>"
"FM 2 preset <#>""AM autoset"
"HD <#>"
1
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"Preset <#>""AM preset <#>"
"Radio off"
"Browse"
2
"Radio on""FM"
"Set PTY""FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Tune"
3
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
1
"Help""FM autoset"
1
If available
2
If you have said "Browse", refer to the "Browse" chart later in this section.
3
If you have said "Tune", refer to the following "Tune" chart.
368
MyLincoln Touch™
"TUNE"
"FM autoset""<530-1710>"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"FM preset <#>""AM"
"FM1""AM <530-1710>"
"FM1 preset <#>""AM preset <#>"
"FM2""AM autoset"
"FM2 preset <#>""AM autoset preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
*
"<87.9-107.9>"
"Preset <#>""FM"
"Help""FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
*
If available
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
Press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen, then select
the SIRIUS tab.
369
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the
memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while
the station is being saved, then sound returns when
it is done.
Presets
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite.
The system alerts you when it plays again on any
SIRIUS channel.
ALERT
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay
approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you
have remained tuned to the current station. If you
change stations, the previous audio is erased.
Replay
1. Press and release the seek buttons to hear the
previous or next song.
2. Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast
forward in the current track.
3. Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
4. Press Replay again to return to live audio if you
have been using the replay feature to replay audio.
Hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Balance and Fade, THX Deep Note
Demo (if equipped), DSP (if equipped), Occupancy
Mode (if equipped), and Speed Compensated
Volume.
Options
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select
the desired category (Rock, Country, etc.) and then
use Seek or Scan to initiate a search for those
channels.
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock
channels, change or reset your PIN or unlock all
channels. To use this feature, you need your initial
PIN which is 1234.
370
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select
Artists, Titles and Teams that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are playing on
other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn
off alerts. You can also set all alerts to on or off.
When an alert appears on the screen, you can
choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert
or to Disable Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting
event, you can save your favorite teams so that the
system can alert you when they are playing on a
satellite radio channel.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on
all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when
communicating with SIRIUS about your account.
Enter the desired satellite channel number using
the on-screen keypad.
Direct Tune
View a list of all available stations. Scroll and select
the desired station.
Browse
You can also lock or skip unwanted channels or view
the song and artist on other stations.
*
SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including
canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time,
with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
371
MyLincoln Touch™
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS satellite
radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term which
begins on the date of sale or lease of
the vehicle. Refer to your authorized
dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and
a complete list of SIRIUS satellite
radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify
or track your satellite radio account.
The ESN is found on the System
Information Screen (SR ESN:
XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, touch the bottom left corner of
the touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS,
Options, then ESN.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels,
freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one
and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate
the interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
372
MyLincoln Touch™
Troubleshooting Tips
ActionCauseRadio Display
None. This message
should disappear shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring...
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a fault.
See your authorized
dealer for service.
Internal module or
system failure present.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS System
Failure.
Tune to another channel
or choose another preset.
Channel no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Subscription not avail-
able for this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When you
move into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
No Signal.
None. The process may
take up to three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to reactivate
or resolve subscription
issues.
Satellite service has been
deactivated by SIRIUS
satellite radio.
Call SIRIUS
1-888-539-7474.
Using the channel guide,
unlock or unskip the
channels.
All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
No Channels Available.
None.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
Subscription Updated.
373
MyLincoln Touch™
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of
the following commands.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say "SIRIUS", then
any of the following commands.
"SIRIUS"
"SAT 2 preset <#>""<0-223>"
"SAT 3""<Channel name>"
"SAT 3 preset <#>""Preset <#>"
"SIRIUS off""SAT"
"SIRIUS on""SAT preset <#>"
"Sports game"
*
"SAT 1"
"Tune"
**
"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"Help""SAT 2"
*
Late availability. If you have said "Sports game", refer to the following "Sports
game" chart.
**
If you have said "Tune", refer to the following "Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME"
"Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game"
"Tune to the <team city> <team name> game"
"Tune to the <team name> game"
"Help"
374
MyLincoln Touch™
"TUNE"
"<0-223>"
"<Channel Name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Help"
CD
E142611
Press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen, then select
the CD tab.
You CanWhen You Select
Choose to repeat the currently playing track, all
tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already
on.
Repeat
Play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or
turn the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.Scan
See disc information.More Info
375
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Sound Adjust Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and
Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and
Speed Compensated Volume.
Options
Compression Turn the compression feature on
and off.
Look through all available audio sources.Browse
You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder (if
applicable).
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say "CD", then any of the following
commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
"Repeat folder"
*
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
376
MyLincoln Touch™
"CD"
"Shuffle CD"
*
"Shuffle folder"
*
"Shuffle off"
"Help"
*
WMA or MP3 only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is
spring-loaded. To remove the SD card,
press the card in and the system ejects
it. Do not attempt to pull the card to
remove it as this could cause damage.
The card slot can also be used for your
navigation system (if equipped). See
Navigation (page 407).
E142619
The SD card slot is located either in
the center console or behind a small
access door in the instrument panel.
To access and play music from your
device, press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E142621
The USB ports are located either in
the center console or behind a small
access door in the instrument panel.
To access and play music from your
device, press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen.
377
MyLincoln Touch™
This feature allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory sticks,
flash drives or thumb drives, and also
charge devices if they support this
feature.
In order to playback video from your
iPod® or iPhone® (if compatible), you
MUST have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple®).
When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end
into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Playing Music from Your Device
E142611
Insert your device and select
the USB or SD Card tab once
the system recognizes it. You
can choose from the following
options:
You CanWhen You Select
Repeat the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Play music on the selected album or folder in
random order.
Shuffle
Choose music similar to that which is currently
playing.
Similar Music
Displays information such as current track, artist
name. album and genre.
More Info
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Midrange, Treble, Balance and Fade, DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy mode (if equipped), and
speed compensated volume.
Options
Media Player Settings allows you to select more
settings, which can be found under Media Player.
See Settings (page 351).
378
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Device Information displays software and firm-
ware information about the currently-connected
media device.
Update Media Index indexes the device each time
it is connected to make sure you have the latest
voice commands available for all media on the
device.
Browse the contents of the device. It also allows
you to search and play by genre, artist, album, etc.
Browse
To view song information such as
Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also press What's Playing?
to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can
be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system
correctly plays your request.
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a USB
device or an SD card, press
the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device
or an SD card, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say "USB" or "SD
card", then any of the following
commands.
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Browse"
1
"Play similar music""Next"
"Play song <name>""Pause"
"Play TV show episode <name>"
2
"Play"
"Play video <name>"
2
"Play album <name>"
"Play video podcast episode <name>"
2
"Play all"
"Play video playlist <name>"
2
"Play artist <name>"
379
MyLincoln Touch™
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Previous""Play audiobook <name>"
"Repeat all""Play author <name>"
"Repeat off""Play composer <name>"
"Repeat one""Play folder <name>"
"Shuffle""Play genre <name>"
"Shuffle off"
"Play movie <name>"
2
"What's this?"
"Play music video <name>"
2
"Help""Play playlist <name>"
"Play podcast <name>"
1
If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the system
prompts you to specify what you would like to browse. When prompted, refer
to the following "Browse" chart.
2
These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
"BROWSE"
"All video podcasts"
*
"Album <name>"
"All videos"
*
"All albums"
"Artist <name>""All artists"
"Audiobook <name>""All audiobooks"
"Author <name>""All authors"
"Composer <name>""All composers"
"Folder <name>""All folders"
"Genre <name>""All genres"
"Playlist <name>"
"All movies"
*
380
MyLincoln Touch™
"BROWSE"
"Podcast <name>"
"All music videos"
*
"TV show <name>"
*
"All playlists"
"Video <name>"
*
"All podcasts"
"Video playlist <name>"
*
"All songs"
"Video podcast <name>"
*
"All TV shows"
*
"Help"
"All video playlists"
*
*
These commands are only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
Supported Media Players,
Formats and Metadata
Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio
formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and
AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags are
descriptive software identifiers
embedded in the media files which
provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify
the empty metadata tags as
Unknown.
In order to playback video from your
iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible),
you MUST have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple®).
When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end
into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream
audio over your vehicle's speakers
from your connected,
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower
left corner on the
touchscreen, then select the
BT Stereo tab.
381
MyLincoln Touch™
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
Note: If your Bluetooth device
supports streaming metadata, all the
commands below are available. If your
device does not, only "Next song",
"Pause", "Play" and "Previous song"
are available.
E142599
If you are listening to a
Bluetooth audio device, press
the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the commands
in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Bluetooth
Audio”, then any of the commands in
the following chart.
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
"Play genre <name>""Browse composer
<name>"
"Browse album <name>"
"Play playlist <name>""Browse folder <name>""Browse all albums"
"Play podcast episode
<name>"
"Browse genre <name>""Browse all artists"
"Play similar music""Browse playlist
<name>"
"Browse all audiobooks"
"Play song <name>""Browse podcast
<name>"
"Browse all authors"
"Previous""Next""Browse all composers"
"Repeat all""Pause""Browse all folders"
"Repeat off""Play""Browse all genres"
"Repeat one""Play album <name>""Browse all playlists"
"Shuffle""Play artist <name>""Browse all podcasts"
"Shuffle album""Play audiobook
<name>"
"Browse all songs"
382
MyLincoln Touch™
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
"Shuffle off""Play author <name>""Browse artist <name>"
"What’s this?""Play composer
<name>"
"Browse audiobook
<name>"
"Help""Play folder <name>""Browse author
<name>"
A/V Inputs
Note: For safety reasons, connecting
or adjusting the settings on your
portable media player should not be
attempted while the vehicle is moving.
Also, the portable media player should
be stored in a secure location, such as
the center console or the glove box,
when the vehicle is in motion. The
audio extension cable must be long
enough to allow the portable media
player to be safely stored while the
vehicle is in motion.
E142622
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect
an auxiliary audio/video source (e.g.,
game systems or personal
camcorders) by connecting RCA cords
(not included) to these input jacks.
The jacks are yellow, red and white
and are located either in the center
console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack (AIJ) to play music
from your portable media player over
your vehicle's speakers. Plug in your
one-eighth inch (3.5 millimeter) RCA
adapter into the two left A/V input
jacks (red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, then select the A/V
Inputs tab.
383
MyLincoln Touch™
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable media
player is designed to be used with
headphones and that it is fully
charged. You also need an audio
extension cable with stereo male
one-eighth inch (3.5 millimeter)
connectors at one end and a RCA jack
at the other.
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and
the radio and portable device
turned off.
2. Attach one end of the audio
extension cable to the headphone
output of your player and the other
end into the adapter in one of the
two left A/V input jacks (white or
red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned
station from the FM tab or the CD
tab (if there is a CD already loaded
into the system). Adjust the
volume to a comfortable listening
level.
4. Turn the portable media player on
and adjust the volume to one-half
the maximum.
5. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it
may be low.)
6. Adjust the sound on your portable
media player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by
switching back and forth between
the controls.
In order to playback video from your
iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible),
you MUST have a special combination
USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple®).
When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end
into both the RCA jacks and the USB
port.
Note: Do not connect the audio input
jack to a line level output. The AIJ only
works correctly with devices that have
a headphone output with a volume
control.
Note: Do not set the portable media
player's volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the
CD or FM radio as this causes distortion
and reduces sound quality.
Note: If the audio sounds distorted at
lower listening levels, turn the portable
media player volume down. If the
problems persists, replace or recharge
the batteries in the portable media
player.
Note: The portable media player must
be controlled in the same manner when
it is used with headphones as the AIJ
does not provide control (e.g., play or
pause) over the attached portable
media player.
384
MyLincoln Touch™
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once your phone is
paired, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice
commands. While the system
supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cellular
phone's functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones
with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download are
phone-dependent features. To check
your phone's compatibility, see your
phone's user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme
caution when using any device that
may take their focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use
SYNC's phone features is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone
with SYNC. This allows you to use
your phone in a hands-free manner.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition
and radio are turned on and that the
transmission is in position P.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to
On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your
phone's user guide if necessary.
385
MyLincoln Touch™
3. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio
display. The display indicates
when the pairing is successful and
asks you if you want to download
your phonebook.
Depending on your phone's capability,
you may be prompted with additional
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your phone's
user guide and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition
and radio are turned on and that the
transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone corner of the
touchscreen, Settings, BT
Devices, then Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to
On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your
phone's user guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC on the screen.
The display indicates when the
pairing is successful. The system
asks you if you want to download
your phonebook.
Depending on your phone's capability,
you may be prompted with additional
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your phone's
user guide and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say "Call
<name>" or say "Dial", the
desired number.
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the
phone button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible
tone sounds. Call information appears
in the display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen
or by pressing this phone
button on your steering wheel
controls.
E142632
Reject the call by pressing
Reject on the touchscreen
or by pressing and holding
this phone button on your steering
wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC
logs it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your
touchscreen to select from the
following options:
386
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call.
Phone
· During an active call, you can also choose to mute
the call, put it on hold, activate privacy (returns the
call to your cellular phone), join two calls or end the
call.
Select and call contacts stored in your phonebook
contacts and call history folder.
Quick Dial
Access and call any contacts in your previously
downloaded phonebook. The system places the
entries in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen.
Phonebook
· To turn on contact picture settings (if your device
supports this feature), press Phone, Settings,
Manage Phonebook, Download Photos from
Phonebook, then select On.
· Certain smartphones may support transferring
street addresses when listed with phonebook
contact information. If this feature is supported, you
can select and use these addresses as destinations
and also save them as favorites.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed
calls while your Bluetooth-enabled phone was
connected to SYNC. You can also choose to save
these to Favorites or Quick Dial.
History
· This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone
does not support downloading call history using
Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made with the
SYNC system.
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See
the Text Messaging section for more information.
Messaging
Access various phone settings such as turning
Bluetooth on and off, managing your phonebook
and more. See the Phone Settings section for more
information.
Settings
387
MyLincoln Touch™
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text
messaging are speed-dependent and
cannot be completed when the vehicle
is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5
km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read
text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text
messages using Bluetooth, read them
aloud and translate text messaging
acronyms such as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the
display to access the Phone
menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen
• Dial
• Send Text
• View
• Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent
feature and cannot be completed when
the vehicle is traveling at speeds over
5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the
display to access the Phone
menu.
2. Press Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose
from your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
• Send, which sends the message
as it is.
• Edit Text, which allows you to
customize the pre-defined
message or create a message on
your own.
You can then preview the message
and verify the recipient as wells as
update the message list and send it
to a connected device (i.e. USB drive).
Text Message Options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
388
MyLincoln Touch™
Text Message Options
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5
km/h), the system offers to read the
message to you instead of allowing you
to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller
name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the
message to you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Phone Settings
Press Phone, then Settings or the
Settings icon, Settings, then Phone
to select from the following settings:
389
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well
as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on or off.Bluetooth On/Off
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not
ring in the vehicle cabin. With this feature turned on,
text message notifications are also suppressed and
do not ring inside the cabin.
Do not disturb
Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. See Information (page
392).
911 Assist
Select what ring tone you would like to hear when
you receive a call. Choose from possible system ring
tones, your currently paired phone's ring tone, a
beep, text-to-speech or if you would like the notific-
ation to be silent.
Phone ringer
Select how you would like to be notified when you
receive a text message, if supported by your phone.
Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Text message notifica-
tion
Use this screen to make adjustments to your
internet data connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the PAN (personal area
network) or to turn off your connection. You can
also choose to make adjustments to your settings
or have the system always connect, never connect
when roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more
information.
Internet Data Connec-
tion
*
Access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Display call history.Display call history
*
If compatible.
390
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say
any of the following commands:
"PHONE"
"Hold call off"
1
"Bluetooth off"
"Hold on"
1
"Bluetooth on"
"Join calls"
1
"Call"
"Listen to text message <#>""Call <name>"
"Listen to text messages""Call <name> at home"
"Messages"
2
"Call <name> at work"
"Mute call"
1
"Call <name> on cell"
"Pair phone""Call <name> on other"
"Privacy on"
1
"Call voicemail"
"Reply to text messages""Dial"
"Turn ringer off""Do not disturb off"
"Turn ringer on""Do not disturb on"
"Unmute call""Forward text messages"
"Help"
"Go to hands free"
1
1
These commands are only available during an active call.
2
If you say "Messages", see the following "Messages" chart for additional
commands.
391
MyLincoln Touch™
"MESSAGES"
"Call"
"Forward text messages"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"
INFORMATION
Under the Information menu, you can
access features such as:
• SYNC® Services
• SIRIUS® Travel Link™
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Applications
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button to access these features. If
your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped,
U.S. Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires
activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and
check your eligibility for complimentary
services. Standard phone and message
rates may apply. Subscription may be
required. You must also have the active
SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected
to the system in order to connect to,
and use, SYNC Services. See Phone
(page 385).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make
sure your cellular phone is not blocking
caller ID before using SYNC Services.
392
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of
the vehicle, and therefore, must
evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads,
traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service
uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle's
current location, travel direction and
speed to help provide you with the
directions, traffic reports, or business
searches you request. Further, to
provide the services you request and
for continuous improvement, the
service may collect and record call
details and voice communications. For
more information, see SYNC Services
Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not
want Ford or its service providers to
collect the vehicle travel information
or other information identified in the
Terms and Conditions, do not activate
or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic
data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn
directions, business search, news,
sports, weather and more. For a
complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services
Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services".
This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired
and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the
service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, such
as "Traffic" or "Directions". You
can also say "What are my
choices?" to receive a complete
list of available services from
which to choose.
4. Say "Services" to return to the
Services main menu or for help,
say "Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services
Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on
your touchscreen.
393
MyLincoln Touch™
1. Select Connect to Services to
initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say
"What are my choices?" to receive
a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
3. To return to the Services menu, say
"Services" or for help, say "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC
Services, say "Directions" or
"Business search". To find the
closest business or type of
business to your current location,
just say "Business search" and
then "Search near me". If you need
further assistance in finding a
location you can say "Operator" at
any time within a Directions or
Business search to speak with a
live operator. You may also be
prompted to speak with an
operator when the automatic
system has difficulty matching
your voice request. The live
operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name
or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by
name or specific street
intersections. Operator Assist is a
feature of your SYNC Services
subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select
your Destination. After the route
download is complete, the phone
call is automatically ended.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in
the right vehicle information
display, in the status bar of your
touchscreen system and also on
the SYNC Services screen. You
also receive driving instructions
from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen
controls or voice commands to
view the Route Summary Turn
List or the Route Status ETA.
You can also turn voice guidance
on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically
asks if you want the route updated.
Just say, "Yes" when prompted and a
new route is delivered to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, SYNC Services downloads
your requested destination to the
navigation system. The navigation
system then calculates the route and
provides driving instructions. See
Navigation (page 407).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
394
MyLincoln Touch™
SYNC Services Quick Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide
quicker access to your most used or favorite
information. You can save address points, such as
work or home. You can also save favorite informa-
tion like sports teams, such as Detroit Lions, or a
news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while you are
connected to SYNC TDI Services) to interrupt a
voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports
report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number). You can pair and
connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with
Traffic, Directions and Information and continue
enjoying your personalized services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls.
When prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"SERVICES"
"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
395
MyLincoln Touch™
"SERVICES"
"Route summary"
"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"
SIRIUS Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in loss of vehicle control,
accident and injury. Ford strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme
caution when using any device or
feature that may take their focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving,
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS Travel
Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD
card must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required
to access and use these features. Go
to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for
more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic#
and click on Coverage map and details
for a complete listing of all traffic areas
covered by SIRIUS Travel Link.
Note: Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is
responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link
services or its use in vehicles.
SIRIUS Travel Link (if activated) can
help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic
alerts, access the current weather
map, get accurate ski conditions and
scores to current sports games.
Press the Information button, select
Sirius Travel Link, then choose from
any of the following services:
You CanWhen You Select
Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby your
vehicle's current location or near any of your favorite
places (if programmed).
Traffic On Route
Traffic Nearby
View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle's
location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
396
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
View the nearby weather, current weather, or the
5-day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to
see the weather map which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds. Select Area to select
from a listing of weather locations.
Weather
View scores and schedules from a variety of sports.
You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a
game is in progress.
Sports Info.
View nearby movie theaters and their show times
(if available).
Movie Listings
View ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice
Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
When prompted, say any of
the following commands:
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
"Sports headlines"
"Sports schedules"
"Sports scores"
"Traffic"
"Weather"
397
MyLincoln Touch™
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"Weather map"
"Help"
*
If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports schedules" or "Sports scores", you can
then say any of the commands in the following chart.
Sports-related Commands
*
"Baseball"
"College basketball"
"College football"
"Golf"
"MLS"
"My teams"
"NBA"
"NFL"
"NHL"
"WNBA"
"Help"
*
If you want to hear headlines, schedules or scores from a particular sport, or
your favorite team(s), say the sport (or team), then "headlines", "schedules"
or "scores".
Additional Sports-related Voice Commands
"NBA scores""MLS headlines""Baseball headlines"
"NFL headlines""MLS schedule""Baseball schedule"
"NFL schedule""MLS scores""Baseball scores"
398
MyLincoln Touch™
Additional Sports-related Voice Commands
"NFL scores""Motor sports headlines""College basketball
schedule"
"NHL headlines""Motor sports order""College basketball
scores"
"NHL schedule""Motor sports schedule""College football head-
lines"
"NHL scores""My team headlines""College football
schedule"
"WNBA headlines""My teams schedule""College football scores"
"WNBA schedule""My teams scores""Golf headlines"
"WNBA scores""NBA headlines""Golf leaderboard"
"Help""NBA schedule""Golf schedule"
Alerts
Press the Information button, then
select Alerts.
You can select a message and choose
to:
• View the complete message
• Delete the message
• Delete All messages
This screen displays any system
messages (i.e., SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information
icon yellow. When the messages are
read or deleted, the icon returns to
white.
Calendar
Press the Information button, then
select Calendar.
911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is
set on prior to a crash, the
system will not dial for help which
could delay response time, potentially
increasing the risk of serious injury or
death after a crash.
399
MyLincoln Touch™
WARNINGS
Do not wait for 911 Assist to
make an emergency call if you
can do it yourself. Dial emergency
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase
the risk of serious injury or death after
a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the
system or phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
Always place your phone in a
secure location in the vehicle so
it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a collision. Failure to do
so may cause serious injury to
someone or damage the phone which
could prevent 911 Assist from working
properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature
must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on,
ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for
important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by
any user, that setting applies for all
paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned
off, either a voice message plays or a
display message/icon comes on (or
both) when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have
trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able
to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist,
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints
System (page 42). Important
information regarding airbag
deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page
238). Important information regarding
the fuel pump shut-off is in this
chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Press the Information button, Apps,
911 Assist, then On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
• Pressing the Settings icon,
Settings, Phone, then 911 Assist
• Pressing the Settings icon, Help,
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and
working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature
activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set
on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and
compatible phone has to be paired
and connected to SYNC.
400
MyLincoln Touch™
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled
phone must have the ability to
make and maintain an outgoing
call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled
phone must have adequate
network coverage, battery power
and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery
power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911
is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist);
however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency
services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to
SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries
to connect to, any available previously
paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of
time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call
results in SYNC attempting to dial
911.
• SYNC says the following, or a
similar message: "SYNC will
attempt to call 911, to cancel the
call, press Cancel on your screen
or press and hold the phone button
on your steering wheel."
If the call is not cancelled and a
successful call is made, a
pre-recorded message is played for
the 911 operator, then the occupant(s)
in the vehicle is able to talk with the
operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and
connected to the system was
thrown from the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may
disclose to emergency services that
the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag
or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators the vehicle location or
other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not
want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
401
MyLincoln Touch™
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and
seek repair for any damage or problem
you suspect. Vehicle Health Report
supplements, but cannot replace,
normal maintenance and vehicle
inspection. Vehicle Health Report only
monitors certain systems that are
electronically monitored by the
vehicle and will not monitor or report
the status of any other system, (i.e.,
brake lining wear). Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance and regularly
inspect your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in
the United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report
feature requires activation prior to use.
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register. There is no fee or subscription
associated with Vehicle Health Report,
but you must register to use this feature
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle
Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in
period for your vehicle, you may not be
able to create a Vehicle Health Report
until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges
may apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and
set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After
registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle).
Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your
report. You can also choose for SYNC
to automatically remind you to run
reports at specific mileage intervals.
Cellular phone airtime usage may
apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle
Health Report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service
Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle
inspections by your authorized
dealer.
Making a Report
To run a report by touchscreen, touch
the Information button, Apps, then
Vehicle Health Report.
E142599
To run a report by voice
command, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
and, when prompted, say "Vehicle
health report".
402
MyLincoln Touch™
Vehicle Health Report Privacy
Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process
your report request) and diagnostic
information about your vehicle.
Certain versions or updates to Vehicle
Health Report may also collect
additional vehicle information. Ford
may use the vehicle information it
collects for any purpose. If you do not
want to disclose your cellular phone
number or vehicle information, do not
run the feature or set up your Vehicle
Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle
Health Report Terms and Conditions,
and Privacy Statement) for more
information.
CLIMATE
Depending on your vehicle line and
option package, your climate screen
may look different than what is shown
here.
E148839
403
MyLincoln Touch™
Power: Touch to turn the climate control system on and off. When
the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings: Touch DUAL to switch passenger side
temperature controls on and off. Touch the + and - to adjust the
temperature. Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat
(if equipped). Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat
(if equipped).
B
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air
circulated in your vehicle.
C
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When recirculated air is selected, the button illuminates
and the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This
may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C)
and may also reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except
MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
D
MAX A/C: Touch to switch on. Recirculated air is distributed through
the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning is automatically adjusted
to the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool
position. This re-cooling of the interior is more economical and efficient.
E
A/C: Touch to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and efficiency.
F
AUTO: Touch to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
adjusts fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
G
Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated
mirrors (if equipped).
H
404
MyLincoln Touch™
Manual airflow distribution controls:Floor/Defrost: Distributes
air through the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents
and rear seat floor vents, and provides outside air to reduce window
fogging. Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Panel/Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. Floor: Distributes
air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again
to return to the previous airflow selection. When switched on, defrost
distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents to reduce window fogging.
I
Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you
may have the following features: Touch the + and - to adjust the
temperature. Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat
(if equipped). Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat
(if equipped). Touch MyTemp to select your previously pre-set
temperature setpoint. Touch and hold MyTemp store a new pre-set
for temperature setpoint. Touch the heated steering wheel icon (if
equipped) to warm the steering wheel.
J
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
a wood-trimmed steering wheel, it
does not heat between the 10 o'clock
and 2 o'clock positions.
Climate Control Voice
Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
When prompted, say any of
the following commands:
Climate Control Commands
"Climate automatic"
"Climate my temperature"
"Climate off"
"Climate on"
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Help"
405
MyLincoln Touch™
There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access
them, you have to say "Climate" first.
When the system is ready to listen,
you may say any of the following
commands:
"CLIMATE"
"Panel on""A/C off"
"Rear defrost on""A/C on"
"Rear defrost off""Automatic"
"Recirc off""Defrost off"
"Recirc on""Defrost on"
"Temperature"
*
"Dual off"
"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees""Floor on"
"Temperature <60-85> degrees""Fan decrease"
"Temperature decrease""Fan increase"
"Temperature high""MAX A/C off"
"Temperature increase""MAX A/C on"
"Temperature low""My temp"
"Windshield floor on""Off"
"Help""On"
"Panel floor on"
*
If you say "Temperature", you can then say any of the commands in the
following chart.
406
MyLincoln Touch™
"TEMPERATURE"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"<60-85> degrees"
"High"
"Low"
"Help"
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be
in the SD card slot to operate the
navigation system. If you need a
replacement SD card, see your
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is
spring-loaded. To remove the SD card,
just push the card in and release it. Do
not attempt to pull the card out to
remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised
of two main features, destination
mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green
corner of your touchscreen, then the
Dest button when it appears. See
Setting a destination later in this
chapter.
To view the navigation map and the
vehicle's current location, touch the
green bar in the upper right hand
corner of the touchscreen, or, press
Dest, then Map. See Map mode later
in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your
touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. Choose any of the
following:
Destination
Street AddressMy Home
IntersectionFavorites
City CenterPrevious Destinations
MapPoint of Interest (POI)
Previous Starting PointEmergency
Latitude/LongitudeFreeway Entrance/Exit
407
MyLincoln Touch™
1. Enter the necessary information
into the highlighted text fields (in
any order). For address destination
entry, the Go! button appears once
all the necessary information has
been entered. Pressing the Go!
button makes the address location
appear on the map. If you choose
Previous Destination, the last 20
destinations you have selected
appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this
your destination. You can also
choose to set this as a waypoint
(have the system route to this
point on the way to your current
destination) or save it as a favorite.
Any Avoid Areas selections are
also considered in route
calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different
types of routes, then select Start
Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving
roads possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest
distance possible.
• Eco (EcoRoute): Uses the most
fuel efficient route.
You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences
like avoiding freeways, toll roads,
ferries and car trains as well as to use
or not use HOV lanes. (HOV lanes are
High Occupancy Vehicle Lanes also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
These lanes are reserved for people
who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools.)
Note: If Start Route button is not
pressed and the vehicle is driven on a
recognized road, the system defaults
to the fastest route option and begins
guidance.
During route guidance, the talking
bubble icon that appears in the upper
right navigation corner (green bar) can
be pressed if the user wants the
system to repeat a route guidance
instruction. Instructions decrease with
each press.
Point of Interest (POI)
Categories
Your system offers a variety if POI
(Points of Interest) categories.
Main Categories
AutomotiveFood/Drink & Dining
ShoppingTravel & Transportation
Entertainment & ArtsFinancial
408
MyLincoln Touch™
Main Categories
Recreation & SportsEmergency
GovernmentCommunity
Domestic ServicesHealth & Medicine
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the +
in front of the POI listing.
The system also allows you to sort the
POIs alphabetically, by distance or by
cityseekr listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately
154 cities (132 in the U.S., 13 in Canada
and 9 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service
which provides additional information
about certain POIs such as
restaurants, hotels and attractions.
409
MyLincoln Touch™
When you have selected a POI, the
location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If the
POI is listed with cityseekr, you also
see information such as a brief
description, check-in and check-out
times, when the restaurant is open,
etc.
Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities,
the average room or meal price as
well as the website. This screen
displays the POI icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the
system.
When you are viewing additional
information for hotels, cityseekr will
also tell you if the hotel has certain
services and facilities using icons.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating,
average cost, review, handicap
access, hours of operation, and
website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check in/out times,
hotel service icons and website
address.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
Select settings for the system to take
into account when planning your
route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.
You CanWhen You Select
· Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
· Choose how you want to view the turn list (top-to-
bottom or bottom-to-top).
410
MyLincoln Touch™
You CanWhen You Select
· Set the automatic parking POI notification. (When
parking POI notification is on, parking POI icons
display on the map when you get close to your
destination. This may not be very useful in dense
areas, and may clutter the map if other POIs are
also set for display.)
· Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car trains
when planning your route.
Route Preferences
· Use HOV lanes (if available), and have the system
always select the shortest distance, fastest time or
most economical route.
· Choose prompts to be either voice or tone only.Navigation Preferences
· Have the system automatically fill in the state and
province based on the information already entered
into the system.
Choose how you want the system to handle traffic
problems along your route.
Traffic Preferences
· Automatic: Have the system reroute you to avoid
traffic incidents that develop and impact the current
route (no notification is provided).
· Manual: Have the system always provide a traffic
alert notification for traffic incidents along the
planned route. You have a choice to accept or ignore
the notification before the route deviation is made.
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid
when calculating a route for you. Press Add to
select a category.
Avoid Areas
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a
selection, choose the listing on the screen; when
the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit, press
Delete at the bottom right of the screen.
411
MyLincoln Touch™
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right
area of the touchscreen to view map
mode. Map mode shows advanced
viewing comprised of both 2D city
maps as well as 3D landmarks (when
available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines
of buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential
cities around the globe. These maps
also contain features such as town
blocks, building footprints, and
railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects which are typically
recognizable and have a certain
tourist value. The 3D landmarks
appear in 3D map mode only.
E142641
Change the appearance of the map
display by repeatedly pressing the
arrow button in the upper left corner
of the screen. It toggles between three
different map modes; Heading up,
North up, and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the
screen. This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers).
For larger map scales, this setting is
remembered, but the map is shown
in North up only. If the scale returns
below this level, then Heading up is
restored.
E142643
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction
to be upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the
map. This viewing angle can
be adjusted and the map can
be rotated 180 degrees by dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with
arrows at the bottom of the map.
E146188
Re-centering the map can
be done by pressing this icon
whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle's current
location.
412
MyLincoln Touch™
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map
mode, then select the + or - zoom
button to bring up the zoom level and
Auto buttons on the touchscreen.
When the Auto button is pressed,
Auto Zoom is turned on and Auto is
displayed in the bottom left corner of
the screen. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower the vehicle is traveling, the
farther in the map is zoomed in; the
faster the vehicle is traveling, the
farther the map is zoomed out. To turn
the feature off, just press the + or -
button again.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the
current location of the
vehicle. It stays in the center
of the map display, except
when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to
scroll the map; the icon is fixed
in the center of the screen. The
map position closest to the cursor is
in a window on the top center part of
the screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location
on the map of an address book
entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored
to the Address Book by any method
other than the map. A different icon
can be selected from the 22 icons
available; each icon can be used more
than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location
on the map currently stored as
the home position. Only one
entry from the Address Book
can be saved as Home. This icon
cannot be changed.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest)
icons can be displayed on the
map and can be turned on or
off. There are about 56 subcategories
of POIs that can be selected to be
displayed on the map one at a time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned
route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the
location of a waypoint on the
map. The number inside the
circle is different for each
waypoint and represents the position
of the waypoint in the route list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates
the ending point of a planned
route.
E142654
Next maneuver point
indicates the location of the
next turn on the planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite
signals are available for
accurate map positioning. This
icon may be intermittently displayed
under normal operation in an area
with poor GPS access.
413
MyLincoln Touch™
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere
on the map display to access the
following options:
You CanWhen You Select
Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by pressing
your index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go and then
press Set as Dest.)
Set as Dest
Set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Select POI icons to be displayed on the map. Up to
three icons can be selected for display on the map
at the same time.
POI Icons On/Off
Cancel the active route.Cancel Route
Access these features when a route is active:View/Edit Route
· View route
· Edit destination/waypoints
· Edit turn list
· Detour
· Edit route preferences
· Edit traffic preferences
· Cancel route.
414
MyLincoln Touch™
E142656
Rotate the map view by swiping your
finger across the shaded bar with the
arrows.
Navteq is the digital map provider for
the navigation application. If you find
map data errors, you may report them
directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com.
Navteq evaluates all reported map
errors and responds with the result of
their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling
1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call
01-800-557-5539) or going to
www.navigation.com/ford. You need
to specify the make and model of your
vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. After
the tone, say any of the following
commands:
Navigation System Voice Commands
"Navigation"
3
"Cancel next waypoint"
1
"Repeat instruction"
1
"Cancel route"
1
"Show 3D"
"Destination"
2
"Show heading up""Destination <nametag>"
"Show map""Destination <POI category>"
"Show north up""Destination favorites"
"Show route"
1
"Destination home"
"Show turn list"
1
"Destination intersection"
"Voice off""Destination nearest <POI category>"
415
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation System Voice Commands
"Voice on""Destination nearest POI"
"Voice volume decrease""Destination play nametags"
"Voice volume increase""Destination POI"
"Where am I?""Destination POI category"
"Zoom in""Destination previous destination"
"Zoom out""Destination street address"
"Help"
"Detour"
1
1
These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.
2
If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the following
"Destination" chart.
3
If you say "Navigation", you can then say any command in the following
"Navigation" chart.
"DESTINATION"
"<nametag>"
"<POI category>"
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest <POI category>"
"Nearest POI"
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
416
MyLincoln Touch™
"DESTINATION"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION"
"Destination"
*
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
*
If you say "Destination", you can then say any command in the "Destination"
chart.
417
MyLincoln Touch™
If your vehicle is equipped with the SD
card navigation feature, you have the
ability to enter in a street address
using a feature called One-Shot
Destination Street Address. When
you say either "Navigation destination
street address" or "Destination street
address", the system asks you to say
the full address. The system displays
an example on-screen. You can then
speak the address naturally, such as
"One two three four Main Street,
Anytown".
418
MyLincoln Touch™
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC® End User License
Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device
("DEVICE") that includes software
licensed by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY from an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation ("MS") .
Those installed software products
of MS origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and
"online" or electronic
documentation ("MS
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property
laws and treaties. The MS
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface
with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface
with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or
systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well
as associated media, printed
materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("FORD
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property
laws and treaties. The FORD
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may
be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with
additional software and/or
systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services
of third party origin, as well as
associated media, printed
materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are
protected by international
intellectual property laws and
treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter
collectively and individually will be
referred to as "SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
("EULA") DO NOT USE THE
DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE:
This EULA grants you the following
license:
419
Appendices
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you
should understand that speech
recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that
recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall
be liable for any damages arising
out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse
Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not
reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE,
except and only to the extent that
such activity is expressly permitted
by applicable law notwithstanding
this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and
Creating Derivative Works: You
may not distribute, copy, make
modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to
the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or
multiple media versions (e.g., in
the user documentation and in the
software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed
to use only one (1) copy of the
SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a
sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you
transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the
media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms
of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must
include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
420
Appendices
• Termination: Without prejudice
to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate
this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this
EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital
Rights Management: Content
owners use the WMDRM
technology included in your
DEVICE to protect their intellectual
property, included copyrighted
content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may
ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE's ability to use
WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not
affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses
for protected content, you agree
that Microsoft may include a
revocation list with the licenses.
Content owners may require you
to upgrade the SOFTWARE on
your DEVICE to access their
content. If you decline an upgrade,
you will not be able to access
content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You
agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software
and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in
any manner as part of product
support services related to the
SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may use this
information solely to improve their
products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a
form that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE
may contain components that
enable and facilitate the use of
certain Internet-based services.
You acknowledge and agree that
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may
automatically check the version of
the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing
and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE
that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services:
The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent to provide or make available
421
Appendices
to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on
components, or Internet-based
services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third
party software and services suppliers
provide or make available to you
Supplemental Components and no
other EULA terms are provided along
with the Supplemental Components,
then the terms of this EULA shall
apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent make available Supplemental
Components, and no other EULA
terms are provided, then the terms of
this EULA shall apply, except that the
MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate
entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor
of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve
the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services
provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the
SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party
sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites
are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor
their designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of
any third party sites, any links
contained in third party sites, or
any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or
any other form of transmission
received from any third party sites.
If the SOFTWARE provides links to
third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a
convenience, and the inclusion of
any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site
by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
• Obligation to Drive
Responsibly: You recognize your
obligation to drive responsibly and
keep attention on the road. You
will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to
safety and assumes any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
422
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY
MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate
from the DEVICE on media such as a
ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web
download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only"
or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you
may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance
with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying
the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the
SOFTWARE (including but not limited
to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text
and "applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of
the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content
which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of
the respective content owner and may
be protected by applicable copyright
or other intellectual property laws and
treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights
not specifically granted under this
EULA are reserved by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service providers, their affiliates and
suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to
such services. If this SOFTWARE
contains documentation that is
provided only in electronic form, you
may print one copy of such electronic
documentation.
423
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union
export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable
international and national laws that
apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations, as well as end-user,
end-use and destination restrictions
issued by U.S. and other governments.
For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not
grant you any rights in connection with
any trademarks or service marks of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party
software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product
support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation
Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product
support, please refer to FORD MOTOR
COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICE.
Should you have any questions
concerning this EULA, or if you desire
to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY
for any other reason, please refer to
the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL
APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS
OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL MS, MICROSOFT
CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR
YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
424
Appendices
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains
software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR
COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal,
reproduction, reverse engineering or
other unauthorized use of the
software from this system in violation
of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to
legal action.
Read and follow instructions:
Before using your Windows
Automotive- based system, read and
follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this
User's Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When
kept in the vehicle, the User's Guide
will be a ready reference for you and
other users unfamiliar with the
Windows Automotive-based system.
Please make certain that before using
the system for the first time, all
persons have access to the User's
Guide and read its instructions and
safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or
other serious consequences. Do not
change system settings or enter data
non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and
legal manner before attempting these
operations. This is important since
while setting up or changing some
functions you might be required to
distract your attention away from the
road and remove your hands from the
wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows
Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate
the system without removing your
hands from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and
legal manner before attempting to
access a function of the system
requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen
may be hazardous if your attention
has been diverted away from your
driving task at a critical time.
425
Appendices
Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
Use of Speech Recognition
Functions: Speech recognition
software is inherently a statistical
process which is subject to errors. It is
your responsibility to monitor any
speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and
safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can seriously distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious
consequences. Stop the vehicle in a
safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the
route suggestions if doing so would
result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
if you would be placed in an unsafe
situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe.
The driver is ultimately responsible for
the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is
safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be
inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving
conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following
the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in
the system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained
in the map database for such
navigation features.
426
Appendices
TeleNav Software End User
License Agreement
Please read these terms and
conditions carefully before you use
the TeleNav Software. Your use of the
TeleNav Software indicates that you
accept these terms and conditions. If
you do not accept these terms and
conditions, do not break the seal of
the package, launch, or otherwise use
the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement
and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You
agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then
current version of this Agreement and
of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting
attention to the TeleNav Software
may pose a risk of injury or death to
you and others in situations that
otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to
comply with the following when using
the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all
traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment
while driving. If you feel that a route
suggested by the TeleNav Software
instructs you to perform an unsafe or
illegal maneuver, places you in an
unsafe situation, or directs you into an
area that you consider to be unsafe,
do not follow such instructions; (c) do
not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software,
unless your vehicle is stationary and
parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav
Software for any illegal, unauthorized,
unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or
unlawful purposes, or in any manner
inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner
in your vehicle so that they will not
interfere with your driving and will not
prevent the operation of any safety
device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold
TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or
otherwise inappropriate use of the
TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your
failure to comply with the directions
above.
427
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav
with true, accurate, current, and
complete information about yourself,
and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly
of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current
and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable
license (except as expressly permitted
below in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software license), without the right
to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only)
in order to access and use the
TeleNav Software. This license shall
terminate upon any termination or
expiration of this Agreement. You
agree that you will use the TeleNav
Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not
to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the
following: (a) reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, translate,
modify, alter or otherwise change the
TeleNav Software or any part thereof;
(b) attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade
names, logos, patent or copyright
notices, or other notices or markings;
(d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity
or privacy or other rights of any party,
(ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but
not limited to laws and regulations
related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is
harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory,
vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out,
or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the TeleNav
Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
428
Appendices
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no
event will TeleNav, its licensors and
suppliers, or agents or employees of
any of the foregoing, be liable for any
decision made or action taken by you
or anyone else in reliance on the
information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not
warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav
Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other
things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other
changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the TeleNav Software
are not intended to support such high
risk applications, especially in more
remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY
ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING,
CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain
jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so
this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
429
Appendices
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL
DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN
AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL
DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY
OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF
TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered
by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa
Clara, California. The arbitrator shall
apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon
the award rendered by the arbitrator
may be entered by any court having
jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge
or jury in an arbitration proceeding and
the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You
expressly agree to waive your right to
a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws
of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws
provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with
the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California.
The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods shall not apply.
430
Appendices
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights
or obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any
such sale, assignment or transfer that
is not expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which
case you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the
TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding
the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this
Agreement to any other party at any
time without notice, provided the
assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you
with respect to the subject matter
hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses
expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and
interest in and to the TeleNav
Software, including without limitation
all related intellectual property rights.
No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall
be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement,
estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav
and its suppliers and licensors hereby
reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly
granted in this Agreement
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required
disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav
Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide
such Notices by posting them on
TeleNav's Website or by downloading
such Notices to your wireless device.
If you desire to withdraw your consent
to receive Notices electronically, you
must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
431
Appendices
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter,
nor shall a waiver of any breach or
default of this Agreement constitute
a waiver of any subsequent breach or
default or a waiver of the provision
itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision
will be modified to reflect the
intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this
Agreement will remain in full force
and effect
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are
for convenience of reference only, will
not be deemed to be a part of this
Agreement, and will not be referred
to in connection with the construction
or interpretation of this Agreement.
As used in this Agreement, the words
"include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed
to be terms of limitation, but rather
will be deemed to be followed by the
words "without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and
Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map
and other data licensed to TeleNav
by third party vendors for the benefit
of you and other end users. This
Agreement includes end-user terms
applicable to these companies
(included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
TeleNav Software is also subject to
such terms. You agree to comply with
the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
TeleNav's third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided ("Data") is
licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or
otherwise using the Data, you agree
to be bound by the terms of this
agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not
permitted to install, copy, use, resell
or transfer the Data. If you wish to
reject the terms of this agreement,
and have not installed, copied, or used
the Data, you must contact your
retailer or NAVTEQ North America,
LLC ("NT") within thirty (30) days of
purchase for a refund of your purchase
price. To contact NT, please visit
www.navteq.com.
432
Appendices
The Data is provided for your personal,
internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright,
and is subject to the following terms
(this "End User License Agreement")
and conditions which are agreed to by
you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ
North America, LLC ("NT") and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including:
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase®.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from
the United States Postal Service ® to
publish and sell ZIP+4 ® information.
© United States Postal Service ®
2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service ® The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain
Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You
agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on
use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for
service bureau, timesharing or other
similar purposes. Except as otherwise
set forth herein, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and
may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer:
Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except
on the condition that you may transfer
the Data and all accompanying
materials on a permanent basis if: (a)
you retain no copies of the Data; (b)
the recipient agrees to the terms of
this End User License Agreement; and
(c) you transfer the Data in the exact
same form as you purchased it by
physically transferring the original
media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you
purchased), all original packaging, all
Manuals and other documentation.
Specifically, Multi-disc sets may only
be transferred or sold as a complete
set as provided to you and not as a
subset thereof.
433
Appendices
Additional License Limitations:
Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in
a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding
paragraph, your license is conditioned
on use of the Data as prescribed in
this agreement, and you may not (a)
use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles capable
of vehicle navigation, positioning,
dispatch, real time route guidance,
fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with, or in
communication with, including
without limitation, cellular phones,
palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants
or PDAs.
WARNING
This Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of
time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of
collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided
to you "as is" , and you agree to use it
at your own risk. NT and its licensors
(and their licensors and suppliers)
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties of any kind, express or
implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, content,
quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data,
or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent
the above exclusion may not apply to
you.
434
Appendices
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT
OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF
THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT
FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF
THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY
DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR
BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF
NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain liability exclusions or damages
limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to
export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof
except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office
of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.
Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the
U.S. Department of Commerce. To the
extent that any such export laws, rules
or regulations prohibit NT from
complying with any of its obligations
hereunder to deliver or distribute Data,
such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this
Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and
conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the
subject matter hereof, and supersedes
in their entirety any and all written or
oral agreements previously existing
between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that
if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that
portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be
given full force and effect.
435
Appendices
Governing Law: The above terms
and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict
of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the personal jurisdiction of
the State of Illinois for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data
is being acquired by or on behalf of
the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed
by the United States government, this
Data is a "commercial term" as that
term is defined at 48 C.F.R. ("FAR")
2.101, is licensed in accordance with
this End User License Agreement, and
each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked
and embedded as appropriate with
the following "Notice of Use", and be
treated in accordance with such
Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street,
Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the End User License
Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
© 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend
provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency,
or any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional
or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire,
© 2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service
may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
"Powered by Gracenote™" logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
436
Appendices
Gracenote® End User License
Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this
device to do disc and music file
identification and obtain
music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title
information ("Gracenote Data") from
online servers ("Gracenote Servers"),
and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End User
functions of this device.
This device may contain content
belonging to Gracenote's providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth
herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and
such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the
content from Gracenote ("Gracenote
Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree
not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with
a music file) to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive
licenses to use the Gracenote
Content, Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and
all use of the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all
rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
either Gracenote become liable for
any payment to you for any
information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in
each company's own name.
437
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to
track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned
numeric identifier is to allow
Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web
page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
438
Appendices
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH
ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND
THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE
LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER
GRACENOTE MAKES ANY
REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT.
GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE
CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE
DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE
THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS
SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR
THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU
WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT
GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS
FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE
SERVICES AT ANY TIME.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment. The term "IC"
before the radio certification number
only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter
must not be co-located or operating
in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
439
Appendices
General Maintenance
Information
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect
or inadequate maintenance and may
help to increase the value of your
vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep
all receipts for completed
maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular
maintenance intervals for your vehicle
based upon rigorous testing. It is
important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These
intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed
and to make sure that the materials
used meet the specifications
identified in this owner's manual. See
Capacities and Specifications
(page 325).
Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance invalidates warranty
coverage on parts affected by the lack
of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in
extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them
become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership
about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft
and Ford-authorized branded
re-manufactured replacement parts.
These parts meet or exceed our
specifications. Parts installed at your
dealership carry a nationwide 12
month or 12000 mile (20000
kilometer) parts and labor limited
warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts
they may not meet our specifications
and depending on the part, it could
affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended
evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and
they offer one stop shopping. They
can perform any services that are
required on your vehicle, from general
maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended
hours or body shops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
440
Scheduled Maintenance
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that
pays dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and
resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure
you have scheduled maintenance
performed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® system,
which displays a message in the
information display at the proper oil
change interval. This interval may be
up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in
the information display, it is time for
an oil change. Make sure you perform
the oil change within two weeks or
500 miles (800 kilometers) of the
ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor® after
each oil change. See Engine Oil
Check (page 267).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative,
you should perform the oil change
interval at six months or 5000 miles
(8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers)
between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and
built with multiple, complex,
performance systems. Every
manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it
is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and
repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has
recommended maintenance intervals
for various parts and component
systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies
upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for
replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest
overall cost to you and recommends
against maintenance schedules that
deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of
only genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the
recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part
of your vehicle’ s normal maintenance.
Please consult your warranty
information.
441
Scheduled Maintenance
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and,
by itself, does not necessarily indicate
a concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert,
such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also
show signs of overheating or foreign
material contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s
oils and fluids at the specified
intervals or in conjunction with a
repair. Flushing is a viable way to
change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems
are flushed only with new fluid that is
the same as that required to fill and
operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following
basic maintenance checks and
inspections every month or at six
month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
442
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running
right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked
regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection
performed at every scheduled
maintenance interval to help make
sure your vehicle keeps running great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamp operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant
expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
443
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a
comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle.
Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of
your vehicle.
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that
determines when you should change
the engine oil based on how your
vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations,
the monitor helps reduce the cost of
owning your vehicle and reduces
environmental waste at the same
time.
This means you do not have to
remember to change the oil on a
mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle
lets you know when an oil change is
due by displaying ENGINE OIL
CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED in the information display.
The following table provides
examples of vehicle use and its
impact on oil change intervals. It is a
guideline only. Actual oil change
intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity
of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleMiles (kilometers)
Normal
7500-10000
(12000-16000)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499
(8000-11999)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
444
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleMiles (kilometers)
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999
(4000-7999)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for
requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking
brake.
Inspect the cabin air filter.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings
(AWD vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft
and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (AWD vehicles).
445
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, loose-
ness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service
intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See
Engine Oil Check (page 267).
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles
(32000 km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of
the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for
the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then
every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
446
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
447
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
448
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
449
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
450
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Special Operating Conditions
If you operate your vehicle primarily
in any of the following conditions, you
need to perform extra maintenance
as indicated. If you operate your
vehicle occasionally under any of
these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or
technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or
within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers)
of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message appearing in the information
display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000 mile (48000
kilometer) automatic transmission
fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30000
miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor® was reset at 25000
miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
451
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by inform-
ation display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently,
service as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial
use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by inform-
ation display and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
452
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See
Engine Oil Check (page 267).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with
regular unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Special Operating Condition Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
453
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
454
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
Exceptions
There are some exceptions your
Normal Scheduled Maintenance:
California fuel filter replacement:
If you register your vehicle in registered
in California, the California Air
Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall
liability before the completion of your
vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor
Company, however, urges you to have
all recommended maintenance
services performed at the specified
intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
455
Scheduled Maintenance
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using
an American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN
quality, the normal oil change interval
is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are
not available, then the oil change
interval is 3000 miles (4800
kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter is
dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the
engine air filter and cabin air filter.
Engine Coolant Change Record
Initial change: Six years or 100000
miles (160000 kilometers)
(whichever comes first).
After initial change: Every three
years or 50000 miles (80000
kilometers).
Engine Coolant Change Log
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
456
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
457
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
458
Scheduled Maintenance
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...............................126
About This Manual..................................7
Protecting the Environment......................7
ABS
See: Brakes..................................................177
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.......................................................178
Accessories...........................................332
Exterior style..............................................332
Interior style...............................................332
Lifestyle.......................................................332
Peace of mind...........................................332
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation...................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control...196
Active Park Assist...............................186
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space.......................................................188
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature.....................................................189
Troubleshooting the System...............189
Using Active Park Assist.........................187
Adjusting the Headlamps................281
Horizontal Aim Adjustment.................282
Vertical Aim Adjustment.......................281
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...........75
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column.......................................................75
Airbag Disposal......................................52
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...............................126
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...............................73
All-Wheel Drive.....................................171
Anti-Theft Alarm...................................73
Arming the Alarm.......................................73
Disarming the Alarm.................................73
Appendices...........................................419
Audible Warnings and
Indicators..............................................99
Headlamps On Warning Chime...........99
Key in Ignition Warning Chime..............99
Keyless Warning Alert..............................99
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.......99
Audio Control..........................................76
Seek, Next or Previous..............................76
Audio System........................................122
General Information.................................122
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..........................................123
Autolamps...............................................82
Automatic Climate Control.............126
Automatic High Beam Control........84
Activating the System..............................85
Manually Overriding the System..........85
Automatic Transmission..................165
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning...................................................169
Brake-Shift Interlock Override............168
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow.........................................................170
Push Button Shift Transmission.........165
SelectShift Automatic®
Transmission..........................................167
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check....................................................272
6F35/HF35 transmission......................272
6F50/6F55 Transmission.....................272
Autowipers..............................................79
Auxiliary Power Points.......................147
110 Volt AC Power Point..........................147
12 Volt DC Power Point............................147
Locations......................................................147
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.................................171
459
Index
B
Blind Spot Monitor..............................212
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic
Alert...........................................................212
Booster Seats..........................................18
Types of Booster Seats.............................19
Brake Fluid Check...............................276
Brakes.......................................................177
General Information.................................177
Breaking-In............................................235
Bulb Specification Chart.................283
C
Cabin Air Filter......................................129
California Proposition 65.....................11
Capacities and Specifications.......325
Technical Specifications.......................329
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior....................284
Center Console....................................149
Changing a Bulb.................................282
Lamp Assembly Condensation..........282
Replacing Bulbs.......................................282
Changing a Fuse..................................251
Fuses.............................................................251
Changing a Road Wheel...................319
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information.......................320
Stowing the flat tire................................323
Tire Change Procedure...........................321
Changing the 12V Battery.................277
Changing the Engine Air Filter - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L.............................280
........................................................................280
2.0L EcoBoost Engine...........................280
3.7L Engine.................................................280
Changing the Wiper Blades............279
Checking MyKey System
Status.....................................................60
Checking the Wiper Blades............279
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance........................................40
Child Safety..............................................15
General Information...................................15
Child Safety Locks................................29
Left-Hand Side...........................................29
Right-Hand Side........................................30
Child Seat Positioning..........................17
Cleaning Leather Seats...................288
Cleaning Products.............................284
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.............289
Cleaning the Engine..........................286
Cleaning the Exterior........................284
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts...........285
Exterior Chrome.......................................285
Underbody.................................................285
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens................287
Cleaning the Interior..........................287
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..................................................286
Clearing All MyKeys.............................59
Climate..................................................403
Climate Control Voice
Commands...........................................405
Climate Control....................................126
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L.................................268
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator..................................................51
Creating a MyKey..................................59
Programming/Changing Optional
Settings.....................................................59
Cruise Control.........................................77
Principle of Operation.............................195
Type 1...............................................................77
Type 2..............................................................77
Cruise Control
See: Using Cruise Control......................195
Customer Assistance........................243
460
Index
D
Data Recording........................................9
Event Data Recording................................10
Service Data Recording..............................9
Daytime Running Lamps...................83
Direction Indicators..............................85
Driver Alert............................................203
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM........204
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL.................207
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION................203
USING DRIVER ALERT..........................203
Driver and Passenger Airbags..........44
Children and Airbags................................45
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment..............................44
Driving Aids...........................................203
Driving Hints.........................................235
Driving Through Water.....................236
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...............83
E
Economical Driving............................235
Electric Parking Brake........................178
Applying the electric parking
brake..........................................................178
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving...............179
Battery With No Charge.........................180
Releasing the electric parking
brake..........................................................179
Emission Control System..................161
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).........162
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing..........................................163
End User License Agreement.........419
SYNC® End User License Agreement
(EULA).....................................................419
Engine Block Heater...........................153
Using the Engine Block Heater............154
Engine Coolant Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L.............................268
Adding Engine Coolant.........................269
Checking the Engine Coolant.............268
Recycled Engine Coolant......................270
Severe Climates.......................................270
What you Should Know About
Fail-Safe Cooling..................................271
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System...........72
Engine Oil Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L..............................267
Adding Engine Oil.....................................267
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System....................................................268
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™........................................267
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L.................267
Engine Specifications.......................325
Drivebelt Routing.....................................325
Entertainment......................................361
A/V Inputs..................................................383
AM/FM Radio............................................363
Bluetooth Audio........................................381
Browsing Device Content.....................362
CD..................................................................375
SD Card Slot and USB Port..................377
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)..............................................369
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information........................381
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake....................178
Essential Towing Checks.................229
Before Towing a Trailer..........................230
Hitches.........................................................229
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC).............231
Safety Chains............................................229
Trailer Brakes.............................................229
Trailer Lamps............................................230
When Towing a Trailer...........................230
461
Index
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording....................................9
Export Unique Options........................14
Exterior Mirrors......................................88
Auto-Dimming Feature...........................89
Blind Spot Monitor....................................90
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.....................89
Heated Exterior Mirrors............................89
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors................89
Memory Mirrors..........................................89
Power Exterior Mirrors..............................88
Signal Indicator Mirrors...........................89
F
Fastening the Safety Belts................32
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt......................35
Restraint of Pregnant Women..............33
Safety Belt Extension Assembly..........36
Safety Belt Locking Modes.....................33
Floor Mats.............................................236
Ford Extended Service Plan
(ESP)....................................................334
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA
ONLY)......................................................336
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)................334
Front Passenger Sensing
System...................................................45
Fuel and Refueling..............................155
Fuel Consumption..............................160
Calculating Fuel Economy....................160
Filling the Tank..........................................160
Fuel Cut-Off Switch..........................239
Fuel Filter...............................................276
Fuel Quality...........................................156
Choosing the Right Fuel........................156
Octane Recommendations..................156
Fuses........................................................251
Fuse Specification Chart.................252
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel........................................................259
Power Distribution Box..........................252
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door
Opener......................................................142
Gauges......................................................94
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge.........................................................95
Fuel Gauge...................................................95
Information Display...................................94
Gearbox
See: Transmission....................................165
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..........................................53
Intelligent Access.......................................53
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S.
and Canada........................................247
Getting the Services You
Need.....................................................243
Away From Home....................................243
Global Opening and Closing............88
Closing the Windows...............................88
Opening the Windows.............................88
H
Hazard Warning Flashers................239
Headlamp Exit Delay...........................83
Head Restraints....................................131
Adjusting the Head Restraint...............132
Tilting Head Restraints (If
Equipped)...............................................133
Heated Seats.........................................137
Rear Heated Seats...................................138
Heated Steering Wheel......................78
Heated Windows and Mirrors.........128
Heated Exterior Mirror.............................128
Heated Rear Window..............................128
Heating
See: Climate Control...............................126
Hill Start Assist.....................................170
Using Hill Start Assist..............................170
462
Index
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..................................................127
Cooling the Interior Quickly..................128
General Hints..............................................127
Heating the Interior Quickly..................128
Recommended Settings for Cooling
.....................................................................128
Recommended Settings for
Heating.....................................................128
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather...................................................128
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes....................................................178
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the
Hood........................................................264
I
In California (U.S. Only)...................244
Information Display Control..............77
Cluster Display Control Features..........77
Information Displays.........................100
General Information...............................100
Information...........................................392
911 Assist®.................................................399
Alerts............................................................399
Calendar.....................................................399
SIRIUS Travel Link...................................396
SYNC Services (If Equipped, U.S.
Only)........................................................392
Vehicle Health Report...........................402
Information Messages......................105
Active Park..................................................105
Adaptive Cruise Control........................106
AdvanceTrac®...........................................107
Airbag............................................................107
Alarm.............................................................107
Automatic Engine Shutdown...............107
AWD..............................................................108
Battery and Charging System.............109
Blind Spot Information and Cross
Traffic Alert System.............................110
Collision Warning System......................110
Doors and Locks..........................................111
Driver Alert.....................................................111
Engine..............................................................111
Fuel..................................................................112
Hill Start Assist...........................................112
Keys and Intelligent Access...................112
Lane Keeping System..............................113
Maintenance................................................114
MyKey.............................................................115
Park Aid.........................................................116
Park Brake....................................................116
Power Steering............................................117
Remote Start...............................................117
Starting System ........................................118
Tire Pressure Monitoring System........118
Traction Control.........................................119
Transmission...............................................119
Installing Child Seats............................21
Child Seats.....................................................21
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts................21
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)..................................26
Using Tether Straps...................................28
Instrument Cluster...............................94
Instrument Lighting Dimmer............83
Interior Lamps........................................85
Front Interior Lamp...................................86
Rear Interior Lamp.....................................86
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release...................................................70
463
Index
Interior Mirror.........................................90
Auto-Dimming Mirror...............................90
Introduction...............................................7
J
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.............240
Connecting the Jumper Cables..........240
Jump Starting.............................................241
Preparing Your Vehicle..........................240
Removing the Jumper Cables..............241
K
Keyless Entry..........................................68
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD.....................................................68
Keyless Starting...................................150
Automatic Engine Shutdown...............152
Fast Restart..................................................151
Starting Your Vehicle..............................150
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving...................................151
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary.............................151
Switching the Ignition On (Accessory
Mode).......................................................150
Keys and Remote Controls................53
Knee Airbag.............................................45
L
Lane Keeping System......................208
Switching the System On and
Off.............................................................209
Lighting Control.....................................82
Headlamp Flasher.....................................82
High Beams..................................................82
Lighting.....................................................82
Lincoln Credit...........................................12
Load Carrying........................................219
Load Limit..............................................219
Vehicle loading - with and without a
trailer.........................................................219
Locking and Unlocking.......................62
Activating Intelligent Access .................63
Autolock Feature........................................64
Auto Relock..................................................64
Battery Saver...............................................65
Illuminated Entry........................................65
Illuminated Exit...........................................65
Luggage Compartment...........................66
Power Decklid (If Equipped).................66
Power Door Locks......................................62
Remote Control..........................................62
Smart Unlocks ...........................................64
Locks..........................................................62
M
Maintenance........................................263
General Information...............................263
Media Hub..............................................125
Memory Function................................135
Easy Entry and Exit Function................137
Linking a Pre-Set Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key.............................................................136
Saving a Pre-Set Position.....................136
Message Center
See: Information Displays.....................100
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.....128
See: Windows and Mirrors......................87
Mobile Communications
Equipment.............................................13
Moonroof..................................................91
Bounce-Back...............................................92
Opening and Closing the
Moonroof..................................................92
Retractable Panoramic Roof.................92
Venting the Moonroof..............................92
Motorcraft Parts.................................325
464
Index
MyKey®....................................................58
Principle of Operation..............................58
MyKey Troubleshooting.......................61
MyLincoln Touch™.............................337
General Information................................337
N
Navigation.............................................407
cityseekr.....................................................409
Map Mode...................................................412
Navigation Map Updates.......................415
Navigation Voice Commands..............415
Point of Interest (POI)
Categories.............................................408
Quick-touch Buttons..............................414
Setting a Destination.............................407
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences............................................410
O
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™/3.7L..................................267
Opening and Closing the
Hood.....................................................264
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature............................................248
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual....................................................249
Overhead Console..............................149
P
Parking Aid............................................184
Front Sensing System............................185
Rear Sensing System..............................185
Parking Aids..........................................184
Passive Anti-Theft System................72
SecuriLock®..................................................72
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System...........72
Perchlorate...............................................12
Personal Safety System™.................41
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..........................................................41
Phone.....................................................385
Making Calls..............................................386
Pairing Subsequent Phones...............386
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time.........................................................385
Phone Menu Options.............................386
Phone Settings.........................................389
Receiving Calls.........................................386
Text Messaging........................................388
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking...................62
Power Seats..........................................133
Multi-Contour Front Seats with Active
Motion (If Equipped)..........................134
Power Lumbar...........................................134
Power Steering Fluid Check............276
Power Windows....................................87
Accessory Delay.........................................88
Bounce-Back...............................................87
One-Touch Down.......................................87
One-Touch Up.............................................87
Window Lock...............................................87
R
Rear Seat Armrest..............................140
Armrest pass-through............................140
Rear Seats..............................................137
Rear View Camera...............................191
Using the Rear View Camera
System......................................................191
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...........................191
Recommended Towing
Weights................................................227
465
Index
Refueling................................................158
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel
System.....................................................159
Remote Control.....................................54
Car Finder......................................................55
Intelligent Access Key...............................54
Remote Start...............................................55
Replacing the Battery...............................54
Sounding a Panic Alarm..........................55
Remote Start........................................129
Automatic Settings..................................129
Heated and Cooled Devices.................130
Last Settings..............................................130
Removing a Headlamp....................282
Repairing Minor Paint
Damage...............................................285
Replacement Parts
Recommendation...............................12
Collision Repairs..........................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts...........13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control....................................................57
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)....................................................250
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only).....................................................249
Roadside Assistance........................238
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting
Roadside Assistance..........................239
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using
Roadside Assistance..........................239
Vehicles Sold In The U.S.: Getting
Roadside Assistance.........................238
Vehicles Sold In The U.S. : Using
Roadside Assistance.........................238
Roadside Emergencies....................238
Running Out of Fuel...........................156
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container.................................................157
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.......36
Safety Belt Minder................................38
Belt-Minder®...............................................38
Safety Belts..............................................31
Principle of Operation................................31
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and
Indicator Chime...................................37
Conditions of operation...........................37
Safety Precautions.............................155
Scheduled Maintenance.................440
Engine Coolant Change Record.........456
Exceptions..................................................455
General Maintenance
Information...........................................440
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance.........................................444
Special Operating Conditions..............451
Seats.........................................................131
Security.....................................................72
Settings...................................................351
Clock..............................................................351
Display..........................................................351
Settings.......................................................353
Sound...........................................................352
Vehicle..........................................................352
Side Airbags...........................................48
Side Curtain Airbags............................49
Sitting in the Correct Position..........131
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains........................319
Special Notices.......................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...............13
Special Instructions....................................13
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control..................................195
Stability Control...................................182
Principle of Operation.............................182
466
Index
Starting a Gasoline Engine..............152
Guarding Against Exhaust
Fumes.......................................................153
Important Ventilating
Information.............................................153
Starting and Stopping the
Engine...................................................150
General Information................................150
Steering...................................................217
Electric Power Steering...........................217
Steering Wheel.......................................75
Storage Compartments...................149
Sun Shades..............................................91
Sun Visors...............................................90
Illuminated Vanity Mirror..........................91
Supplementary Restraints
System...................................................42
Principle of Operation..............................42
Symbols Glossary....................................7
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...325
See: Temporary Mobility Kit................292
See: Temporary Mobility Kit................292
T
Temporary Mobility Kit.....................292
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air.............294
General Information...............................293
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure..................................................296
Tips for Use of the Kit............................293
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed......................................................297
What to do when a Tire Is
Punctured..............................................294
The Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program (U.S.
Only).....................................................245
Tire Care................................................304
Glossary of Tire Terminology..............306
Information About Uniform Tire
Quality Grading....................................304
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall..................................................307
Temperature A B C..................................305
Traction AA A B C....................................305
Treadwear..................................................305
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System................................................298
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.............................300
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ............................300
Tire Pressures
See: Technical Specifications.............324
Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit................292
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires...........................292
Towing a Trailer....................................227
Load Placement.......................................227
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.................................................232
Emergency Towing..................................232
Recreational Towing...............................232
Towing.....................................................227
Traction Control....................................181
Principle of Operation..............................181
Transmission Code
Designation........................................328
Transmission.........................................165
Transporting the Vehicle...................231
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™........................................265
467
Index
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L..........266
Universal Garage Door
Opener..................................................142
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System......................................................142
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.......196
Blocked Sensor.........................................201
Changing the Set Speed.......................199
Detection Issues......................................200
Disengaging the System........................199
Following a Vehicle..................................197
Hilly Condition Usage............................200
Low Speed Automatic
Cancellation.........................................200
Overriding the System............................199
Resuming the Set Speed.....................200
Setting a Speed.........................................197
Setting the Gap Distance......................198
Switching the System Off....................200
Switching the System On.....................196
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control....................................................202
System Not Available.............................201
Using All-Wheel Drive.........................171
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)......................172
Using Cruise Control..........................195
Switching Cruise Control Off...............196
Switching Cruise Control On................195
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.................................................60
Using Snow Chains............................319
Using Stability Control......................183
AdvanceTrac® ..........................................183
Using Traction Control.......................181
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.................................................181
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)................247
V
Vehicle Care.........................................284
General Information...............................284
Vehicle Certification Label..............328
Vehicle Identification Number.......327
Vehicle Storage...................................289
Battery..........................................................291
Body.............................................................290
Brakes...........................................................291
Cooling system........................................290
Engine..........................................................290
Fuel system...............................................290
General........................................................290
Miscellaneous............................................291
Removing Vehicle From Storage........291
Tires...............................................................291
Ventilated Seats..................................139
Heated and cooled seat air filter
replacement (if equipped)...............139
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...............................126
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number....327
Voice Control...........................................77
468
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.......95
Adaptive Cruise Control..........................95
Anti-Lock Braking System......................96
Battery...........................................................96
Blind Spot Monitor....................................96
Brake System..............................................96
Cruise Control.............................................96
Direction Indicator.....................................96
Door Ajar.......................................................96
Electric Park Brake....................................96
Engine Coolant Temperature.................97
Engine Oil......................................................97
Fasten Safety Belt......................................97
Front Airbag..................................................97
Front Fog Lamps .......................................97
Heads Up Display.......................................97
High Beam.....................................................97
Hood Ajar.......................................................97
Lane Keeping Aid........................................97
Low Fuel Level.............................................97
Low Tire Pressure Warning....................98
Low Washer Fluid......................................98
Parking Lamps............................................98
Powertrain Fault.........................................98
Service Engine Soon.................................98
Stability Control.........................................99
Stability Control Off..................................99
Trunk Ajar......................................................99
Washer Fluid Check............................277
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior....................284
See: Wipers and Washers.......................79
Waxing...................................................285
Wheels and Tires................................292
Technical Specifications.......................324
Windows and Mirrors...........................87
Windshield Washers...........................80
Windshield Wipers...............................79
Intermittent Wipe.......................................79
Speed Dependent Wipers.......................79
Wipers and Washers............................79
469
Index
470
